From 43a97878ce14b72f0981164f87f2e35e14151312 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Daniel Baumann Date: Sun, 7 Apr 2024 11:22:09 +0200 Subject: Adding upstream version 110.0.1. Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann --- .../chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml | 491 ++++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml | 366 +++ .../chrome/common/help/certs_prefs_help.xhtml | 128 + .../suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml | 2624 ++++++++++++++++++++ .../chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml | 751 ++++++ .../common/help/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml | 369 +++ .../common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml | 716 ++++++ .../chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml | 149 ++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml | 1451 +++++++++++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/developer_tools.xhtml | 50 + l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml | 912 +++++++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf | 161 ++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-index1.rdf | 2247 +++++++++++++++++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-indexAZ.rdf | 41 + l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-win.rdf | 119 + .../suite/chrome/common/help/helpFileLayout.css | 70 + l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help_help.xhtml | 118 + .../chrome/common/help/images/anchor-in-doc.gif | Bin 0 -> 126 bytes l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/broken.gif | Bin 0 -> 203 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/bullets.gif | Bin 0 -> 154 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/columns.png | Bin 0 -> 139 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/composer_icon.png | Bin 0 -> 2124 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_nav.png | Bin 0 -> 2885 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_print.gif | Bin 0 -> 723 bytes l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/image.gif | Bin 0 -> 489 bytes l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/link.gif | Bin 0 -> 419 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/locationbar.png | Bin 0 -> 2622 bytes .../common/help/images/locationbar_search.png | Bin 0 -> 773 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag.png | Bin 0 -> 171 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag_column.png | Bin 0 -> 204 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/mail_junk_column.png | Bin 0 -> 571 bytes .../common/help/images/mail_newmail_alert.png | Bin 0 -> 7661 bytes .../common/help/images/mail_newmail_balloon.png | Bin 0 -> 2123 bytes .../common/help/images/mail_newmail_trayicon.png | Bin 0 -> 222 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/mail_quicksearch.png | Bin 0 -> 531 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read.png | Bin 0 -> 110 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/mail_read_column.png | Bin 0 -> 185 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/mail_unread.png | Bin 0 -> 144 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/menubar.png | Bin 0 -> 1130 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/numbers.gif | Bin 0 -> 181 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/offline.png | Bin 0 -> 184 bytes l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/online.png | Bin 0 -> 180 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/personalbar.png | Bin 0 -> 7045 bytes l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/reload.gif | Bin 0 -> 2860 bytes .../help/images/search_navigation_toolbar.png | Bin 0 -> 817 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/sidebar.png | Bin 0 -> 11615 bytes .../common/help/images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png | Bin 0 -> 4278 bytes l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/table.gif | Bin 0 -> 512 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_mail.png | Bin 0 -> 2079 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/task_newmail.png | Bin 0 -> 2184 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar-ab.png | Bin 0 -> 2130 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar.png | Bin 0 -> 2349 bytes .../chrome/common/help/images/threadbutton.png | Bin 0 -> 589 bytes .../suite/chrome/common/help/images/web-links.png | Bin 0 -> 226 bytes .../common/help/mailnews_account_settings.xhtml | 1225 +++++++++ .../chrome/common/help/mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml | 571 +++++ .../common/help/mailnews_blogs_and_feeds.xhtml | 388 +++ .../common/help/mailnews_getting_started.xhtml | 390 +++ .../chrome/common/help/mailnews_newsgroups.xhtml | 203 ++ .../chrome/common/help/mailnews_offline.xhtml | 504 ++++ .../chrome/common/help/mailnews_organizing.xhtml | 848 +++++++ .../chrome/common/help/mailnews_preferences.xhtml | 792 ++++++ .../chrome/common/help/mailnews_security.xhtml | 463 ++++ .../chrome/common/help/mailnews_using_mail.xhtml | 1188 +++++++++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/nav_help.xhtml | 1440 +++++++++++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/page_info_help.xhtml | 214 ++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/passwords_help.xhtml | 407 +++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/privacy_help.xhtml | 343 +++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/privsec_help.xhtml | 252 ++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/profiles_help.xhtml | 113 + l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts.xhtml | 524 ++++ .../chrome/common/help/shortcuts_composer.xhtml | 184 ++ .../chrome/common/help/shortcuts_mailnews.xhtml | 365 +++ .../chrome/common/help/shortcuts_navigator.xhtml | 541 ++++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/ssl_help.xhtml | 226 ++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suite-toc.rdf | 1203 +++++++++ l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suitehelp.rdf | 58 + .../chrome/common/help/using_certs_help.xhtml | 598 +++++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/using_priv_help.xhtml | 1134 +++++++++ .../suite/chrome/common/help/welcome_help.xhtml | 96 + 80 files changed, 25033 insertions(+) create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_prefs_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/developer_tools.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-index1.rdf create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-indexAZ.rdf create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-win.rdf create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/helpFileLayout.css create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/anchor-in-doc.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/broken.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/bullets.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/columns.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/composer_icon.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_nav.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_print.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/image.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/link.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar_search.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag_column.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_junk_column.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_alert.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_balloon.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_trayicon.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_quicksearch.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read_column.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_unread.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/menubar.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/numbers.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/offline.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/online.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/personalbar.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/reload.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/search_navigation_toolbar.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/sidebar.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/table.gif create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_mail.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_newmail.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar-ab.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/threadbutton.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/web-links.png create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_account_settings.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_blogs_and_feeds.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_getting_started.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_newsgroups.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_offline.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_organizing.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_preferences.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_security.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_using_mail.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/nav_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/page_info_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/passwords_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privacy_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privsec_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/profiles_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_composer.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_mailnews.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_navigator.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/ssl_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suite-toc.rdf create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suitehelp.rdf create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_certs_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_priv_help.xhtml create mode 100644 l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/welcome_help.xhtml (limited to 'l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help') diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a472473f59 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cert_dialog_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,491 @@ + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Certificate Information and Decisions + + + + +
This document is provided for your information only. + It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of + your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, + address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a + recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security + protection on the Internet.
+ +

Certificate Information and + Decisions

+ +

This section describes how to use various windows displayed at different times by + Certificate Manager. The additional information given here appears when you click + the Help button in one of those windows.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Certificate Viewer

+ +

The Certificate Viewer displays information about a certificate you selected + in one of the Certificate Manager tabs. The General tab summarizes + information about who issued the certificate, its verification status, what + the certificate can be used for, and so on. The Details tab provides complete + details on the certificate's contents.

+ +

If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Viewer, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
  3. Click Manage Certificates.
    4. +
  4. Click the tab for the type of certificate whose details you want to + view.
    5. +
  5. Select the certificate whose details you want to view.
    6. +
  6. Click View.
    7. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

General Tab

+ +

When you first open the Certificate Viewer, the General tab displays several + kinds of information about the selected certificate:

+ + + +

Details Tab

+ +

Click the Details tab at the top of the Certificate Viewer to see more + detailed information about the selected certificate. To examine information + for any certificate in the Certificate Hierarchy area, select its name, + select the field under Certificate Fields that you want to examine, and + read the field's value under Field Value:

+ + + +

The Certificate Viewer displays basic ANSI types in human-readable form + wherever possible. For fields whose contents the Certificate Manager cannot + interpret, it displays the actual values contained in the certificate.

+ +

Choose Security Device

+ +

A security device (sometimes called a token) is a hardware or software + device that provides cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption + and stores certificates and keys. The Choose Security Device window appears + when Certificate Manager needs help deciding which security device to use + when importing a certificate or performing a cryptographic operation, such as + generating keys for a new certificate. This window allows you to select one + of two or more security devices that Certificate Manager has detected on your + machine.

+ +

A smart card is one example of a security device. For example, if a smart + card reader connected to your computer has a smart card inserted in it, the + name of the smart card will show up in the drop-down menu. In this case, you + must choose the name of the smart card from the menu to let Certificate + Manager know that you want to use it.

+ +

The Certificate Manager also supplies its own default, built-in security + device, which can always be used no matter what additional devices are or + aren't available.

+ +

Encryption Key Copy

+ +

Certificate authorities (CAs) + that issue separate signing and encryption email certificates typically make + backup copies of your private + encryption key during the + certificate enrollment process.

+ +

The Encryption Key Copy dialog box allows you to approve the creation of + such a backup or cancel the certificate request. A CA that has archived a + backup copy of your encryption key has the potential capability of + decrypting any messages you receive that were encrypted with your + corresponding public key.

+ +

You can take these actions from the Encryption Key Copy dialog box:

+ + + +

After your CA makes a backup copy of the encryption key, you will be able to + use that key to access your encrypted mail even if you lose your password or + lose your own copy of the key. If no backup copy of your encryption key + exists and you lose your password or the key, you will have no way of reading + email messages that were encrypted with that key.

+ +

Certificate Backup

+ +

When you receive a certificate, make a backup copy of the certificate and + its private key, then store the copy in a safe place. For example, you can + put the copy on a floppy disk and store it with other valuable items under + lock and key. That way, even if you have hard disk or file corruption + problems, you can easily restore the certificate.

+ +

It can be inconvenient, at best, and in some situations catastrophic to lose + your certificate and its associated private key, depending on what you use it + for. For example:

+ + + +

Like any other valuable data, certificates should be backed up to avoid + future trouble and expense. Do it now so you don't forget.

+ +

User Identification Request

+ +

Some websites require that you identify yourself with a certificate rather + than a name and password, because certificates provide a more reliable form + of identification. This method of identifying yourself over the Internet is + sometimes called + client authentication.

+ +

However, Certificate Manager may have more than one certificate on file that + can be used for the purposes of identifying yourself to a website. In this + case, Certificate Manager presents the User Identification Request dialog + box, which displays two kinds of information:

+ +

This site has requested that you identify yourself with a + certificate: This section of the dialog box lists the following + information:

+ + + +

Choose a certificate to present as identification: The + certificates you have available for the purposes of identifying yourself to a + website are listed in the drop-down list in this section of the dialog box. + Choose the certificate that seems most likely to be recognized by the website + you want to visit.

+ +

To help you decide, the following details of the selected certificate are + displayed:

+ + + +

New Certificate Authority

+ +

The certificates that the Certificate Manager has on file, whether stored on + your computer or on an external security device such as a smart card, include + certificates that identify + certificate authorities (CAs). + To be able to recognize any other certificates it has on file, Certificate + Manager must have certificates for the CAs that issued or authorized issuance + of those certificates.

+ +

When you decide to trust a CA, Certificate Manager downloads that CA's + certificate and can then recognize the kinds of certificates you trust that + CA to issue.

+ +

Before downloading a new CA certificate, Certificate Manager allows you to + specify the purposes for which you trust the certificate, if at all. You can + select any of the following options:

+ + + +

Before you decide to trust a new CA, make sure that you know who is + operating it. Make sure the CA's policies and procedures are + appropriate for the kinds of certificates it issues. For example, if the CA + issues certificates identifying websites you use for financial transactions, + make sure you are comfortable with the level of assurance the CA + provides.

+ + + +

Website Certificates

+ +

When you attempt to go to a website that supports the use of + SSL for + authentication and + encryption, you may be faced with an + error page. There are two types, one called + Secure Connection Failed and one + called Untrusted Connection.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Secure Connection Failed Page

+ +

In the case where you have disabled the SSL protocol (e.g. through + SSL/TLS Settings) or the website + that you are accessing is using an older, insecure version of the SSL protocol + then you will be presented with a page titled "Secure Connection + Failed". That page contains some basic background information (including + the Error code that uniquely identifies the type of problem + &brandShortName; detected with the website) and a Try Again + button that triggers a page reload.

+ +

Untrusted Connection Page

+ +

If SSL itself is enabled then the error page that you will be presented with + will be titled "This Connection is Untrusted". There are many + different reasons why a connection can appear untrusted. Here are some of the + most common ones:

+ + + +

The page displayed in the above cases is meant to help you understand why + &brandShortName; was unable to establish a secure connection to the website. + It starts by telling you that the website's identity could not be + verified, then offers you to leave the page by clicking the This + sounds bad, take me to my home page instead button. If you are unsure + what to do it is recommended that you follow this advice.

+ +

If you want to know a little bit more about the actual problem at hand you + may expand the corresponding section by clicking the chevron in front of + Technical Details. That section also contains the + Error code that uniquely identifies the type of problem + &brandShortName; detected with the website.

+ +

Adding a Security Exception

+ +

The I Understand the Risks section of the Untrusted + Connection page allows you to tell &brandShortName; to explicitly override the + security checks for this website by adding an exception. If you expand the + section by clicking the chevron in front of it you will see an Add + Exception button that will take you to a dialog allowing you to get + and view the website's certificate and optionally add a Security + Exception for it (either permanently or just for the current session). Those + exceptions can be administered through the Certificate Manager's + Servers tab.

+ +

Secure Connection Failed Dialog

+ +

In cases where &brandShortName; cannot determine the actual cause of the + problem a dialog titled "Secure Connection Failed" is shown in + addition to the Untrusted Connection + page. That dialog includes a View Certificate button + that allows you to examine the website's certificate more closely.

+ +

Certificate Expired

+ +

Like a credit card, a driver's license, and many other forms of + identification, a certificate is + valid for a specified period of time. When a certificate expires, the owner + of the certificate needs to get a new one.

+ +

&brandShortName; warns you when you + attempt to visit a website whose server certificate has expired. The first + thing you should do is make sure the time and date displayed by your computer + is correct. If your computer's clock is set to a date that is after the + expiration date, &brandShortName; treats the website's certificate as + expired.

+ +

If your computer's clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision + about whether to trust the website. This decision depends on what you intend + to do at the website and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites + will make sure that they replace their certificates before they expire. If you + choose to continue you need to add a + security exception.

+ +

Certificate Not Yet Valid

+ +

Like a credit card, a driver's license, and many other forms of + identification, a certificate is + valid for a specified period of time.

+ +

&brandShortName; warns you when you + attempt to visit a website whose server certificate's validity period has + not yet started. The first thing you should do is make sure the time and date + displayed by your own computer is correct. If your computer's clock is + set to the wrong date, &brandShortName; may treat the server certificate as + not yet valid even if this is not the case.

+ +

If your computer's clock is set correctly, you need to make a decision + about whether to trust the website. This decision depends on what you intend + to do at the website and what else you know about it. Most commercial sites + will make sure that the validity period for their certificates has begun + before beginning to use them. If you choose to continue you need to + add a security exception.

+ +

Domain Name Mismatch

+ +

A server certificate specifies the + name of the server in the form of the website's domain name. For example, + the domain name for the Mozilla website is www.mozilla.org. If the + domain name in a server's certificate doesn't match the actual + domain name of the website, it may be a sign that someone is attempting to + intercept your communication with the website.

+ +

&brandShortName; warns you when you + attempt to visit a website whose server certificate's domain does not + match the domain of the website you are trying to visit. The decision whether + to trust the website anyway depends on what you intend to do at the site and + what else you know about it. Most commercial sites will make sure that the + host name for a website certificate matches the website's actual host + name. If you choose to continue you need to + add a security exception.

+ +

If you decide to accept the certificate anyway (either for this session or + permanently), you should be cautious about what you do on the website, and you + should treat any information you find there as potentially suspect.

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b9f3427372 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,366 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Certificate Manager + + + + +
This document is provided for your information only. + It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of + your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, + address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a + recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security + protection on the Internet.
+ +

Certificate Manager

+ +

This section describes how to use the Certificate Manager. For more + information on using certificates, see Using + Certificates.

+ +

If you are not currently viewing the Certificate Manager window, follow + these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
  3. Click Manage Certificates.
    4. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Your Certificates

+ +

The Your Certificates tab in the Certificate + Manager displays the certificates on file that identify you. Your + certificates are listed under the names of the organizations that issued + them. If you can't see certificate names under an organization's + name, double-click the name to expand it.

+ +

Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions + require one or more certificates to be selected):

+ + + +

Choose a Certificate Backup + Password

+ +

A certificate backup password protects one or more certificates that you are + backing up from the Your Certificates tab in + the Certificate Manager.

+ +

The Certificate Manager asks you to set this password when you back up + certificates, and requests it when you attempt to import certificates that + have previously been backed up.

+ + + +

If someone obtains the file containing a certificate that you have backed up + and successfully imports the certificate, that person can send messages or + access websites while pretending to be you. This can be a problem, for + example, if you digitally sign important email messages or manage your bank + or investment accounts over the Internet.

+ +

Therefore, it's important to select a certificate backup password that + is difficult to guess. The password quality meter gives you + a rough idea of the quality of your password as you type it based on factors + such as length and the use of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers, + and symbols. It does not guarantee that your password cannot be guessed, + however.

+ +

For further guidelines, see + Choosing a Good + Password.

+ +

It's also important to record the password in a safe place—and + not anywhere that's easily accessible to someone else. If you forget + this password, you can't import the backup of your certificate.

+ +

Delete Your Certificates

+ +

Before deleting one of your own expired certificates from the + Your Certificates tab in the Certificate + Manager, make sure you won't need it again some day for reading old + email messages that you may have encrypted with the corresponding private + key.

+ +

People

+ +

The People tab in the Certificate Manager + displays email certificates you have on file that identify other people.

+ +

When people send you digitally signed email messages, Certificate Manager + imports their certificates automatically. You can use these certificates to + send encrypted messages to those people.

+ +

Certificates that identify people are listed under the names of the + organizations that issued them. If you can't see certificate names under + an organization's name, double-click the name to expand it.

+ +

Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions + require one or more certificates to be selected):

+ + + +

Delete Email Certificates

+ +

Before deleting someone else's certificate from the + People tab in the Certificate Manager, make sure you + won't need it again some day to send encrypted email to that person or + to verify digital signatures on messages from that person.

+ +

Servers

+ +

The Servers tab in the Certificate Manager displays certificates you have + on file that identify servers (websites, mail servers).

+ +

Certificates that identify servers are grouped under the names of the + organizations that issued them. If you can't see certificate names under + an organization's name, double-click the name to expand it.

+ +

Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions + require one or more certificates to be selected):

+ + + +

Delete Website Certificates

+ +

Before deleting a server certificate from the + Servers tab in the Certificate Manager, make sure that + you won't need it again for the purposes of identifying a website or + mail server and setting up an encrypted connection.

+ +

Authorities

+ +

The Authorities tab in the Certificate + Manager displays the certificates you have on file that identify + certificate authorities + (CAs).

+ +

CA certificates are grouped under the names of the organizations that issued + them. If you can't see certificate names under an organization's + name, double-click the name to expand it.

+ +

Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates (most actions + require one or more certificates to be selected):

+ + + +

To ensure that an entire + certificate chain of CAs are + all trusted, you need to edit the root CA certificate only.

+ +

To import the chain, you click a link on a web page provided by the CA. You + can then use the authorities tab to locate the root certificate and edit its + trust settings.

+ +

The root and intermediate CAs all appear under the same organization. The + root certificate is the one that lists itself as the issuer.

+ +

If you download an intermediate CA: If you download an + intermediate CA certificate that chains to a root certificate already marked + as trusted in your browser, you don't have to indicate what purposes you + trust it for. Intermediate certificates automatically inherit the trust + settings of their roots.

+ +

Edit CA Certificate Trust + Settings

+ +

When you select a CA certificate from the + Authorities tab in the Certificate Manager and + click Edit, you see a window entitled Edit CA certificate trust + settings. Here you specify the kinds of certificates you trust this CA + to certify. If you deselect all the checkboxes, Certificate Manager will not + trust any certificates issued by this CA.

+ +

The settings have these effects:

+ + + +

Click OK to confirm the settings you have selected.

+ +

Delete CA Certificates

+ +

Before deleting a CA certificate from the + Authorities tab in the Certificate Manager, + make sure that you won't need it again to validate certificates issued + by that CA. If you delete the only valid certificate you have for a CA, + Certificate Manager will no longer trust any certificates issued by that + CA.

+ +

Others

+ +

The Others tab in the Certificate Manager displays certificates you have + on file that do not fit in any of the other categories, i.e. certificates + that neither belong to you, other people, servers or CAs.

+ +

Other certificates are grouped under the names of the organizations that + issued them. If you can't see certificate names under an + organization's name, double-click the name to expand it.

+ +

Use the following buttons to view and manage your certificates:

+ + + +

Device Manager

+ +

This section describes the options available in the Device Manager window. + For background information and step-by-step instructions on the use of the + Device Manager, see + Managing + Smart Cards and Other Security Devices.

+ +

If you are not currently viewing the Device Manager window, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
  3. In the Certificates panel, click Manage Security Devices.
    4. +
+ +

The Device Manager lists each available PKCS #11 module, and the security + devices managed by each module below the module's name.

+ +

When you select a module or device, information about the selected item + appears in the middle of the window, and some of the buttons on the right + side of the window become available. In general, you perform an action on + a module or device by selecting its name and clicking the appropriate + button:

+ + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_prefs_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_prefs_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a6aae1b376 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/certs_prefs_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Privacy & Security Preferences - Certificates + + + + +

Certificate Settings

+ +

This section describes how to set your certificate preferences and how to + use the Certificate Manager, Device Manager, and other dialog boxes related + to certificates.

+ +

For step-by-step descriptions of various tasks related to certificates, see + Using Certificates.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Privacy & Security + Preferences - Certificates

+ +

This section describes use the Certificates preferences panel. To view + Certificates preferences, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ +

Client Certificate Selection

+ +

Some websites require you to identify yourself with a certificate. The + option you select here determines how the browser identifies the certificate + to present among those you may have on file:

+ + + +

Manage Certificates

+ +

Certificates are the digital equivalent of ID cards—they help other + people identify you, and they help you identify other people, websites, and + organizations.

+ +

To examine or configure the certificates you have on file, click Manage + Certificates. See Managing + Certificates for further information on this dialog.

+ +

Manage Security Devices

+ +

A security device is a hardware or software device that stores your + certificates and keys. For example, a smart card is a security device. Your + browser has its own built-in software security device, and you can use + additional security devices, such as smart cards, at the same time.

+ +

To examine or configure your security devices, click Manage Security + Devices. See Managing + Smart Cards and Other Security Devices for further information on + this dialog.

+ +

OCSP

+ +

A certificate revocation list (CRL) is a list of revoked certificates that + is generated and signed by a + certificate authority + (CA). The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) makes it possible for + Certificate Manager to perform an online check of a certificate's + validity each time the certificate is viewed or used. This process involves + checking the certificate against a CRL maintained at a server specified by + the CA of that certificate. Your computer must be online for OCSP to work.

+ +

The following settings in the OCSP section of the Certificates preferences + panel determine how Certificate Manager uses OCSP:

+ + + +

For more detailed information on certificate validation, see + How Certificate + Validation Works.

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ca46addd1f --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/composer_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,2624 @@ + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Creating Web Pages with &brandShortName; Composer + + + + +

Creating Web Pages with + &brandShortName; Composer

+ +

&brandShortName; Composer lets you create your own web pages and publish + them on the web. You don't have to know HTML to use Composer; it is as + easy to use as a word processor.

+ +

Toolbar buttons let you add lists, tables, images, links to other pages, + colors, and font styles. You can see what your document will look like on + the Web as you create it, and you can easily share your document with + other users, no matter what type of browser or HTML-capable email program + they use.

+ +

To start using &brandShortName; Composer:

+ + + +
+
Composer icon
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Starting a New Page

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Creating a New Page

+ +

&brandShortName; Composer is an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) editor that + allows you to create and edit web pages. Composer is a WYSIWYG (What + You See Is What You Get) editor, so you can display how your page will look + to the reader as you're creating it. It is not necessary for you to know + HTML, since most of the basic HTML functions are available as commands from + the toolbars and menus.

+ +

Composer also lets you edit the HTML source if you want. To view or edit the + HTML source code, open the View menu, and choose HTML Source, or click the + <HTML> Source tab in the Edit Mode toolbar at the bottom of the + Composer window.

+ +

To create a web page, use one of the methods described below. Once + you've started a page, you can add and edit text just as you would + in a word processor.

+ +

To create a new page from the browser:

+ + + +

To edit a page you're currently viewing in the + browser:

+ + + +

To create a new page in Composer:

+ + + +

To start from an HTML file stored on your local drive:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Composer. You see the Composer + window.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Open File. You see the Open HTML File + dialog box.
    3. +
  3. On your local drive, locate the file that you want to edit.
    4. +
  4. Click Open to display the specified file in a Composer window.
    5. +
+ +

To edit a web page:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Browser.
    2. +
  2. Go to a web page: type the URL of the page (for example, + http://www.mozilla.org) in the Location Bar and press + ReturnEnter.
    3. +
  3. Open the File menu and choose Edit Page.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: In the Composer window you can quickly open the most + recent file you've been working on by opening the File menu, choosing + Recent Pages, and then selecting the file you want from the list.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Saving and Browsing Your New + Page

+ +

You can save Composer documents in HTML or text-only format. Saving a + document in HTML format preserves the document's formatting, such + as text styles (for example, bold or italic), tables, links, and images. + Saving a document in text-only format removes all the HTML tags but + preserves the document's text.

+ +

To save a document as an HTML file:

+ + + +

To change the filename or location of an existing HTML file:

+ + + +

When you save a page in Composer, all parts of the page (the HTML, images + and other files, such as sound files and style sheets), are saved locally + on your hard drive. If you only want to save the HTML part of the page, you + must change the Composer preference for saving pages. See + Composer Preferences - Composer for more information + on changing Composer's setting for saving pages.

+ +

If an image location is absolute (starts with http://) and you are + connected to the Internet, you will still see that image in the document in + Composer and the browser. However, if the image location is relative to the + page location (starts with file:///), then you won't see the + image in the local version of the document.

+ +

To save a document as a text-only file:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Export to Text.
    2. +
  2. Enter the filename and specify the location where you want to save the + file.
    3. +
+ +

Note: Images do not appear in documents saved in the + text-only format.

+ +

Tip: You can choose Revert to Last Saved from the File + menu to retrieve the most recently saved copy of the document in which + you're working. Keep in mind that your current changes will be lost.

+ +

To view your page in a browser window in order to test your links:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Formatting Your Web Pages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Formatting Paragraphs, + Headings, and Lists

+ +

To apply a format to a paragraph, begin from the Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the format to begin, + or select the text you want to format.
    2. +
  2. Choose a paragraph format using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar: +
      +
    • Body Text: Applies the application default font and + style for regular text, without affecting the spacing before or after + the text.
      • +
    • Paragraph: Inserts a paragraph tag (use this to + begin a new paragraph). The paragraph includes top and bottom + margins.
      • +
    • Heading 1 - Heading 6: Formats the + paragraph as a heading. Heading 1 is the highest-level heading, while + Heading 6 is the lowest-level heading.
      • +
    • Address: Can be used for a web page signature + that indicates the author of the page and the person to contact for + more information, for example: user@example.com + +

      You might want to include the date and a copyright notice. This + format usually appears at the bottom of the web page under a + horizontal line. The browser displays the address format in + italics.

      +
      • +
    • Preformat: This is useful for elements such as code + examples, column data, and mail messages that you want displayed in a + fixed-width font. In normal text, most browsers remove extra spaces, + tabs, and paragraph returns. However, text that uses the Preformatted + style is displayed with the white space intact, preserving the layout + of the original text.
      • +
    +
    3. +
+ +

To format text as a heading:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point anywhere within the text that you + want to format.
    2. +
  2. Using the drop-down list in the Format toolbar, choose the level of + heading you want, from 1 (largest) to 6 (smallest). Choose Heading 1 + for your main heading, Heading 2 for the next level, and so + forth.
    3. +
+ +

To apply a list item format:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the line of text that you want + to format.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List.
    3. +
  3. Choose the list style: +
      +
    • Bulleted: Each item has a bullet (dot) next to it + (as in this list).
      • +
    • Numbered: Items are numbered.
      • +
    • Term and Definition: These two + styles work together, creating a glossary-style appearance. Use the + Term tag for the word being defined, and the Definition tag for the + definition. The Term text appears flush left, and the Definition + text appears indented.
      • +
    +
    4. +
+ +

Tip: You can quickly apply a list style to a block of + text by selecting the text and clicking the Numbered List + + or Bulleted List + + buttons on the Format toolbar.

+ +

To change the style of bullets or numbers:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the text of the list item you + want to change, or select one or more items in the list if you want to + apply a new style to the entire list.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose List Properties.
    3. +
  3. Select a bullet or number style from the drop-down list. For numbered + lists, you can specify a starting number. For bulleted lists, you can + change the bullet style.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: You can also double-click on a bullet or number in a + list to display the List Properties dialog box.

+ +

To align a paragraph or text in your page, for example, centering or + aligning to the left or right:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the paragraph or line of text + you want to align.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Align; then choose an alignment + option.
    3. +
+ +

Note: You can also use the Format toolbar to align + text.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Working with Lists

+ +

To end a list and continue typing body text:

+ + + +

To change one or more list items to body text:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item, or select the + list items.
    2. +
  2. In a numbered list, click the numbered list button (or in a bulleted + list, click the bulleted list button) in the Format toolbar.
    3. +
+ +

To position indented text below a list item:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point within the list item.
    2. +
  2. Press Shift+ReturnEnter to create the hanging indent.
    3. +
  3. Type the text you want to indent.
    4. +
  4. Press Shift+ReturnEnter to create another indented paragraph, or press + ReturnEnter to create the + next list item.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: You can increase or decrease the indentation of list + items by clicking anywhere in a list item and then clicking the Indent or + Outdent button on the Format toolbar. Alternatively, click anywhere in a + list item and press Tab to indent one level. Press + Shift+Tab to outdent one level.

+ +

To merge two adjacent lists:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the two lists that you want to merge. Be sure to select all of + the elements in both lists. Note that any text in between the two lists + will also become part of the merged list.
    2. +
  2. Click the bulleted or numbered list button in the Format toolbar to + merge the lists.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Changing Text Color, Style, and + Font

+ +

To change the style, color, or font of selected text:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text you want to format.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose one of the following: +
      +
    • Font: Use this to choose a font. If you prefer to + use fonts specified by the reader's browser, select Variable + Width or Fixed Width. + +

      Note: The fonts Helvetica, Arial, Times, and + Courier generally look the same when viewed on different computers. + If you select a different font, it may not look the same when viewed + using a different computer.

      +
      • +
    • Size: Use this to choose a relative font + size or select an option to increase or decrease text size (relative + to the surrounding text).
      • +
    • Text Style: Use this to select a style, such as + italic, bold, or underline, or to apply a structured style, for + example, Code.
      • +
    • Text Color: Use this to choose a color from the + color picker. If you are familiar with HTML hexadecimal color codes, + you can type a specific code or you can just type a color name (for + example, blue). You'll find the official W3C list of CSS + supported color names + here, + and another list of commonly supported color names + here. +
      • +
    +
    3. +
+ +

To change the background color of the page:

+ +
    +
  1. Click anywhere in the page.
    2. +
  2. Click the background color block in the Format toolbar.
    3. +
  3. Choose a background color from the Block Background Color dialog + box.
    4. +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly change the color of text to the color + last used, select the text, then press Shift and click on the text color + block in the Format toolbar. This is useful when you want to use one + color for separate lines of text.

+ +

You can also use an image as a background. See + Setting Page Colors and + Backgrounds.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Removing or Discontinuing Text + Styles

+ +

To remove all text styles (bold, italic, and so on) from selected text:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove All Text Styles.
    3. +
  3. Continue typing.
    4. +
+ +

To continue typing text with all text styles removed:

+ +
    +
  1. Place the insertion point where you want to discontinue the text + styles.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Text Styles.
    3. +
  3. Continue typing.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Finding and Replacing Text

+ +

To find text in the page you're currently working on:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your + search.
    2. +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and + Replace dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Type the text you want to locate in the Find what field. To narrow + the search, check one or more of the following options: +
      +
    • Match exact case: Use this to specify whether + the search is for case-sensitive text.
      • +
    • Wrap around: Use this to search to the end of the + page and then start again from the top or bottom, depending on whether + you are searching forward or backwards.
      • +
    • Search backwards: Use this to search back from the + insertion point to the beginning of the page.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Click Find Next to begin searching. When Composer locates the first + occurrence of the text, click Find Next to search for the next + occurrence.
    5. +
  5. Click Close when you are done.
    6. +
+ +

To find and replace text in the page you're currently working on:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to begin your + search.
    2. +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Find and Replace. You see the Find and + Replace dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Type the text you want to find and then type the replacement text.
    4. +
  4. To narrow the search, check one or more of the following options: +
      +
    • Match exact case: Use this to specify whether + the search is for case-sensitive text. If you don't select this + option, the search will find matching text in both upper and lower + case.
      • +
    • Wrap around: Use this to search to the end of the + page and then start again from the top.
      • +
    • Search backwards: Use this to search from the end + to the beginning of the page.
      • +
    +
    5. +
  5. Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence. Composer selects the + next occurrence of the text.
    6. +
  6. Click Replace to replace the selected text with the replacement text. + Click Replace and Find to replace the selected text and find the next + occurrence. Click Replace All to replace every occurrence in the document + with the replacement text.
    7. +
  7. Click Close when you are done.
    8. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Inserting Horizontal Lines

+ +

Horizontal lines are typically used to separate different sections of a + document visually. To insert a horizontal line (also called a rule) + in your page, begin from the Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the line to + appear.
    2. +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Horizontal Line.
    3. +
+ +

Setting Horizontal Line + Properties

+ +

You can customize a line's height, length, width, alignment, and + shading.

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click the line to display the Horizontal Line Properties dialog + box.
    2. +
  2. Edit any of these properties: +
      +
    • Width: Enter the width and then choose % of + window or pixels. If you specify width as a percentage, + the line's width changes whenever the Composer window's + or browser window's width changes.
      • +
    • Height: Type a number for the line's height + (in pixels).
      • +
    • 3-D Shading: Select this to add depth to the line + by adding a bevel shading.
      • +
    • Alignment: Specify where you want to place the + line (left, center, or right).
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click Use as Default to use these settings as the default the next time + you insert a horizontal line.
    4. +
  4. To edit the properties of a horizontal line manually, click Advanced + Edit. See the section, + Advanced Property Editor, + for details.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: You can select HTML Tags from the View menu to + show all the HTML elements in yellow boxes. Click any yellow box to select + everything within that HTML tag or element. Double-click any yellow box to + display the + Advanced Property Editor + dialog box for that HTML tag or element.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Inserting Special Characters

+ +

To insert special characters such as accent marks, copyrights, or currency + symbols:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the special character + to appear.
    2. +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Characters and Symbols. You see the + Insert Character dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Select a category of characters. +
      +
    • If you choose Accent Uppercase or Accent Lowercase, then open the + Letter drop-down list and select the letter you wish to apply an + accent to. (Note: not all letters have accented forms.) Select + Common Symbols to insert special characters such as copyright symbols + or fractions.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. From the Character drop-down list, select the character you want to + insert.
    5. +
  5. Click Insert. + +

    You can continue typing in your document (or in a mail compose window) + while you keep this dialog box open, in case you want to use it + again.

    +
    6. +
  6. Click Close when you are done inserting special characters.
    7. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Inserting HTML Elements and + Attributes

+ +

If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can insert + additional tags, style attributes, and JavaScript into your page. If you are + not sure how to work with HTML source code, it's best not to change it. + To work with HTML code, use one of these methods:

+ + + +

Using the Advanced Property + Editor

+ +

To add HTML attributes and JavaScript to objects such as tables, images, + and horizontal lines, you can use the Advanced Property Editor.

+ +

Note: Unless you clearly understand how to add, delete, or + modify HTML attributes and their associated values, it's best not to do + so.

+ +

If you are not currently viewing the Advanced Property Editor dialog box, + follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. From the View menu (or the Edit Mode toolbar), choose HTML Tags.
    2. +
  2. Double-click the object that you want to modify to open its Properties + dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Click Advanced Edit to open the object's Advanced Property Editor. + The Advanced Property Editor has three tabs, each of which lists the + current properties for the selected object: +
      +
    • HTML Attributes: Click this tab to view or enter + additional HTML attributes.
      • +
    • Inline Style: Click this tab to view or enter + additional CSS (cascading style sheet) properties through the + <style> attribute. For more information on using CSS styles + in Composer, see + Composer Preferences -Composer.
      • +
    • JavaScript Events: Click this tab to view or enter + JavaScript events.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. To edit a property or attribute in any of the three lists, select the + attribute you want to edit. You can then edit the attribute's name + or value using the editable Attribute and Value fields at the bottom of + the dialog box. To add a new attribute, type it in the Attribute field + at the bottom of the dialog box. The new attribute is automatically added + when you click in the Value field. To remove an attribute, select it in + the list, and click Remove Attribute. + +

    Note: Required attributes are highlighted in the + Attribute list.

    +
    5. +
  5. Click OK to apply your changes to the Advanced Property Editor dialog + box.
    6. +
  6. Click OK again to exit the Properties dialog box.
    7. +
+ +

Composer automatically places quotation marks around any attribute text.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Validating the HTML

+ +

Before you put your document on a web server so that others can see it, you + should first check the document's HTML formatting to make sure it + conforms to web standards. Documents containing validated HTML are less + likely to cause problems when viewed by different browsers. Just visually + checking your web pages in the browser doesn't ensure that your document + will appear correctly when viewed in other web browsers.

+ +

Composer provides a convenient way for you to check that your document + conforms to W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) HTML standards. Composer uses + the W3C HTML Validation Service, which checks your document's HTML + syntax for compliance with HTML 4.01 standards. This service also provides + information on how to correct errors.

+ +

Note: You must be connected to the Internet to use this + feature.

+ +

To validate your document's HTML syntax:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Validate HTML. If you have unsaved + changes, Composer asks you to save them before proceeding.
    2. +
  2. When the W3C HTML Validation Service page appears, click Browse + and locate the file on your hard disk that you want to validate.
    3. +
  3. Click Check.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Choosing the Right Editing Mode

+ +

Typically, you won't need to change the editing mode from the default + (Normal). However, if you want to work with the document's HTML source + code, you may want to change editing modes.

+ +

Composer allows you to quickly switch between four editing modes or views. + Each editing mode allows you to continue working on your document, but + displays varying levels of HTML tags (and tag icons).

+ +

Before you choose an editing mode:

+ + + +

The Edit Mode toolbar has four tabs:

+ + + +

Note: JavaScript functions, frames, links, embedded objects + and animated GIF files are not active in any of the editing modes. To display + these items in their active state, click the Browse button on the Composition + toolbar to load the page into a browser window.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Adding Tables to Your Web Page

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Inserting a Table

+ +

Tables are useful for organizing text, pictures, and data into formatted + rows and columns. To insert a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the table to appear.
    2. +
  2. Click the Table button + on the + Composition toolbar. The Insert Table dialog box appears.
    3. +
  3. Type the number of rows and columns you want. +
      +
    • (Optional) Enter a size for the table width, and select either + percentage of the window or pixels.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Enter a number for the border thickness (in pixels); enter zero for no + border. + +

    Note: Composer uses a red dotted line to indicate + tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page + is viewed in a browser.

    +
    5. +
  5. To apply additional table attributes or JavaScript, click Advanced Edit + to display the + Advanced Property Editor. +
    6. +
  6. Click OK to confirm your settings and view your new table.
    7. +
+ +

To change additional properties for your new table, see + Changing a Table's + Properties. +

+ +

Tip: To insert a table within a table, open the + Insert menu and choose Table.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Changing a Table's Properties

+ +

This section describes how to modify properties that apply to an entire + table as well as the rows, columns, or individual cells within a table. If + you are not currently viewing the Table Properties dialog box, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the table, or click anywhere inside it.
    2. +
  2. Click the Table button + on the + toolbar, or open the Table menu and choose Table Properties. The Table + Properties dialog box contains two tabs: Table and Cells.
    3. +
  3. Click the Table tab to edit these properties: +
      +
    • Size: Use this to specify the number of rows and + columns. Enter the width of the table and then choose % of + window or pixels. If you specify width as a percentage, the + table's width changes whenever the Composer window's or + browser window's width changes.
      • +
    • Borders and Spacing: Use this to specify, in pixels, + the border line width, the space between cells, and the cell padding + (the space between the contents of the cell and its border). + +

      Note: Composer uses a dotted outline to display + tables with a zero border; the dotted line disappears when the page + is viewed in a browser.

      +
      • +
    • Table Alignment: Use this to align the table within + the page. Choose an option from the drop-down list.
      • +
    • Caption: Choose the caption placement from the + drop-down list.
      • +
    • Background Color: Use this to choose a color for + the table background, or leave it as transparent.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit + to display the Advanced + Property Editor. +
    5. +
  5. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or + click OK to confirm them.
    6. +
+ +

To view, change, or add properties for one or more cells:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the row, column, or cell, then open the Table menu and choose + Table Properties. The Table Properties dialog box appears.
    2. +
  2. Click the Cells tab to edit the following properties: +
      +
    • Selection: Choose Cell, Row, or Column from the + drop-down list. Click Previous or Next to move through rows, columns, + or cells.
      • +
    • Size: Type a number for Height and Width, and then + choose % of table or pixels.
      • +
    • Content Alignment: Select a vertical and horizontal + alignment type for the text or data inside each cell.
      • +
    • Cell Style: Select Header from the drop-down list + for column or row headers (which centers and bolds the text in the + cell); otherwise choose Normal.
      • +
    • Text Wrap: Select Don't wrap from the + drop-down list to keep text from wrapping to the next line unless you + insert a paragraph break. Otherwise, choose Wrap.
      • +
    • Background Color: Select a color for the cell + background or leave it as transparent. + +

      Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript + events, click Advanced Edit to display the + Advanced Property + Editor +

      +
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click Apply to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, or + click OK to confirm them.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: To change the text color or background color of one + or more selected cells or the entire table, select the cells or click + anywhere in the table and then click the text color or background color + icon in the Format toolbar.

+ +

Tip: To change the color of cells to the color last used, + select the cell, then press Shift and click on the background color picker. + This is useful when you want to use one color for individual cells.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Adding and Deleting Rows, + Columns, and Cells

+ +

Composer allows you to quickly add or delete one or more cells, columns, + or rows in a table. In addition, you can set options that allow you to + maintain the original rectangular structure or layout of the table while + you perform editing tasks.

+ +

To add a cell, row, or column to your table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click inside the table where you want to add a cell (or cells).
    2. +
  2. Open the Table menu and then choose Insert.
    3. +
  3. Choose one of the cell groupings. (You can also insert a new table + within a table cell.)
    4. +
+ +

To delete a cell, row, or column:

+ +
    +
  1. Click a row, column, or cell to place the insertion point. Or, + select neighboring cells to delete more than one row at a time. To + select neighboring cells, drag over the cells you want to select. + To select individual cells in a table, hold down the + CmdCtrl key and click + on the cells you want to select.
    2. +
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Delete.
    3. +
  3. Choose the item you want to delete.
    4. +
+ +

To join (or merge) a cell with the cell on its right:

+ + + +

To join (or merge) adjacent cells:

+ + + +

To split a joined cell back into two or more cells:

+ + + +

Refer to Selecting Table Elements + for information on how to select non-adjacent cells, rows, and + columns.

+ +

Changing the Default Table + Editing Behavior

+ +

By default, when you delete one or more cells, Composer preserves the + table's structure by adding cells at the end of a row, wherever + needed. This allows you to delete one or more cells but still maintain + the table's original rectangular layout, or structure. Otherwise, + deleting cells can result in a table with empty spaces, or whose outline + appears irregular due to an uneven number of cells.

+ +

To change the default table editing behavior, begin from the Composer + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu, choose Preferences, and then choose + Composer.
    2. +
  2. Under Editing, set the following preference: +
      +
    • Make sure that Maintain table layout when inserting or + deleting cells is checked to ensure that you don't get an + irregularly shaped table.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click OK.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Selecting Table Elements

+ +

You can use one of two ways to quickly select a table, cell, or group of + cells:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Moving, Copying, and Deleting + Tables

+ +

To move a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Click inside the table.
    2. +
  2. Open the Table menu, choose Select, and then choose Table.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Converting Text into a Table

+ +

To convert text into a table:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text that you want to convert into a table. Keep in mind that + Composer creates a new table row for each paragraph in the selection.
    2. +
  2. Open the Table menu and choose Create Table from Selection. You see the + Convert to Table dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Choose the character Composer uses to separate the selection into + columns, or specify a different character to use. If you choose Space as + the separator for columns, choose whether or not you want Composer to + ignore multiple space and treat them as one space.
    4. +
  4. Leave Delete separator character checked to have Composer remove + the separator character when it converts the text into a table. If you + don't want Composer to delete the separator character, uncheck this + option.
    5. +
  5. Click OK.
    6. +
+ +

Note: Text formatting is removed when the selected text + is converted to a table.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Adding Pictures (Images) to Your Web + Page

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Inserting an Image into Your + Page

+ +

You can insert GIF, JPEG, BMP, and PNG (Portable Network Graphics) images + into your web page. You can also use them to + create links. When you insert an image, + Composer saves a reference to the image in your page.

+ +

Note: If you plan to publish your pages to the web, + it's best not to use BMP images in your pages.

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your page + before you insert images into it. This allows Composer to automatically + use relative references to images once you insert them.

+ +

To insert an image:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the image to + appear.
    2. +
  2. Click the Image button + + on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Image. You see the + Image Properties dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Type the location and filename of the image file, or click Choose File + to search for an image file on your hard drive or network.
    4. +
  4. Type a simple description of your image as the alternate text that will + appear in text-only browsers (as well as other browsers) when an image is + loading or when image loading is disabled. + +

    Alternatively, you can choose not to include alternate text.

    +
    5. +
  5. If needed, click other tabs so you can adjust the settings (for + example, alignment) in the + Image Properties dialog box.
    6. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly insert an image: Drag and drop it onto + your page.

+ +

Tip: To insert a line break after all images in a + paragraph, choose Break Below Images from the Insert menu.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Editing Image Properties

+ +

Once you've inserted an image into your page, you can edit its + properties and customize the layout in your page, such as the height, + width, spacing, and text alignment. If you are not currently viewing + the Image Properties dialog box, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click the image, or select it and click the Image button + on the toolbar + to display the Image Properties dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click the Location tab to edit these properties: +
      +
    • Image Location: Type the filename and location of + the image file. Click Choose File to search for an image file on your + hard drive or network.
      • +
    • URL is relative to page location: If checked, + Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page's location. + This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web + server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you + to keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other, + regardless of their location on your hard disk or a web server. + +

      Unchecking this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full + (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to + images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard + disk).

      + +

      If you have never saved or published the page, you must first save + the page in order to enable this checkbox. (This checkbox is not + available if you open the Image Properties dialog box in a message + compose window.)

      +
      • +
    • Attach this image to the message: If checked, + the image is attached to the message you are sending. If unchecked, a + link to the image location is inserted instead. (This checkbox is only + available if you open the Image Properties dialog box in a message + compose window.)
      • +
    • Alternate Text: Enter text that will display in + place of the original image; for example, a caption or a brief + description of the image. It's a good practice to specify + alternate text for readers who use text-only web browsers or who have + image loading turned off.
      • +
    • Don't use alternate text: Choose this option + if the image does not require alternate text or if you don't want + to include it.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click the Dimensions tab to edit these properties: +
      +
    • Actual Size: Select this option to undo any changes + you've made to the dimensions and return the image to its original + size.
      • +
    • Custom Size: Select this option and specify the new + height and width, in pixels or as a percentage. This setting + doesn't affect the original image file, just the image inserted + in your page.
      • +
    • Constrain: If you change the image size, it's + a good idea to select this in order to maintain the image's aspect + ratio (so that it doesn't appear distorted). If you choose this + option, then you only need to change the height or width, but not + both.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Click the Appearance Tab to edit these properties: +
      +
    • Spacing: Specify the amount of space surrounding + the image; between the image and adjoining text. You can also put a + solid black border around the image and specify its width in pixels. + Specify zero for no border.
      • +
    • Align Text to Image: If you've placed your + image next to any text, select an alignment icon to indicate how you + want text positioned relative to the image.
      • +
    • Image Map: Click Remove to remove any image map + settings.
      • +
    +
    5. +
  5. Click the Link tab to edit these properties: +
      +
    • Enter a web page location: If you want to define + a link for this image, enter the URL of a remote or local page, or + select a named anchor or heading from the drop-down list. Click Choose + File to search for a file on your hard drive or network.
      • +
    • URL is relative to page location: If checked, + Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page's location. + This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web + server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to + keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other, + regardless of their location on your hard disk or a web server. + +

      Unchecking this box causes Composer to convert the URL to a full + (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to files + on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disk).

      + +

      If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order + to enable this checkbox. (This checkbox is not available if you open + the Image Properties dialog box in a message compose window.)

      +
      • +
    • Show border around linked image: If checked, + displays the link highlight color around the image.
      • +
    +
    6. +
  6. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit + to display the + Advanced Property Editor. +
    7. +
  7. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    8. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Adding Mathematical + Formulas to Your Web Page

+ +

Inserting a + Mathematical Formula into Your Web Page

+ +

&brandShortName; Composer allows you to write mathematical formulas, encoded + in your web page as MathML and + generated from a convenient + LaTeX-like syntax.

+ +

To insert a formula:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the formula to + appear.
    2. +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Math. You see the Math Insert dialog + box.
    3. +
  3. Enter your LaTeX source code, for example \frac{\sqrt{\pi}}{3} + to write + π3\frac{\sqrt{\pi}}{3}. + In order to help you, a preview of the formula as well as a panel of + predefined constructions are available. For details, see + Editing the LaTeX source. +
    4. +
  4. Choose the style for your formula: +
      +
    • Inline mode: If selected, the formula is inserted + inside the current paragraph of text and rendered in a way that + minimizes its height as much as possible. This mode is typically used + for small expressions. For example this is an expression in inline mode: + ∫Dxdx\int_D x dx.
      • +
    • Display mode: If selected, the formula is inserted + in its own block and uses the standard rendering. This mode is typically + used for large expressions. For example this is an expression in display + mode: + ∫abf(x)dx\int_a^b {f(x)}\, dx
      • +
    +
    5. +
  5. Choose the overall direction of your formula: +
      +
    • Left-to-right direction: If selected, the formula + will be laid out from left to right, e.g. x\sqrt{x}. + This is the standard orientation in most countries.
      • +
    • Right-to-left direction: If selected, the formula + will be laid out from right to left, e.g. + ج\sqrt{ج}. + This is the standard orientation in some Arabic countries.
      • +
    +
    6. +
  6. Verify that the LaTeX source does not contain any syntax error and click + Insert to create your new formula.
    7. +
+ +

To modify a mathematical formula, move the insertion point inside it. + Then open the context menu and choose Advanced Properties to + edit the LaTeX source again. + Alternatively, you can open the Insert menu and choose Math. +

+ +

Note: &brandShortName; Composer attaches the LaTeX source to + the generated MathML expressions so that they can be edited again. In + general it is currently not possible to edit an arbitrary MathML expression + unless it has a LaTeX expression associated that is supported by + &brandShortName; Composer. +

+ +

Editing the LaTeX Source

+ +

The Insert Math box contains a text field where you can enter mathematical + expressions using a LaTeX-like syntax. + If you are not familiar with LaTeX, here are the basics: +

+ + + +

There exists a large collection of LaTeX commands and there is not any + finite and well-defined list of them. &brandShortName; Composer only supports + the TeXZilla commands + which are themselves based on the itex2MML commands + and should cover the most popular constructions. One of the nice features of + TeXZilla is that it accepts arbitrary characters as input so that + \left⌊α^2\right⌋ is equivalent to the more verbose + \left\lfloor\alpha^2\right\rfloor and generates + ⌊α2⌋\left⌊α^2\right⌋.

+ +

You do not need to know all the LaTeX commands to edit formulas. Instead, a + panel of predefined expressions is available. Click any of the panel buttons + to insert the corresponding LaTeX expression. Arguments in LaTeX expressions + are represented by ellipses. You can just edit the LaTeX source to + replace them with the actual content you want.

+ +

Tip: If you select a subexpression in the LaTeX source field + and use the construction panel to insert a LaTeX expression with at least one + argument, that subexpression will be used as the first argument of the + new expression.

+ +

[Return to + beginning of section]

+ +

Setting Page Properties

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Setting Page Properties and Meta + Tags

+ +

Use the Page Properties dialog box to enter properties such as the title, + author, and description of the document you're currently working on. + This information is useful if you plan to use the page on a website, since + search engines use this type of information to index your page. You can view + this information from the browser window by opening the View menu and + choosing Page Info.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Title and Properties.
    2. +
  2. Edit any of the following properties: +
      +
    • Title: Type the text you want to appear as the + window title when someone views the page through a browser. This + is how most web search tools locate web pages, so choose a title + that conveys what your page is about.
      • +
    • Author: Type the name of the person who created the + document. This information is helpful to readers who locate the + document by using a web search tool to search on name. + +

      Tip: If you enter the Author name in + Composer's preferences, then + you won't have to enter it each time you create a new page.

      +
      • +
    • Description: Enter a brief description of the + document's contents.
      • +
    +
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Setting Page Colors and + Backgrounds

+ +

You can change the background color or specify a background + image for the page you're currently working on. These choices + affect the way text and links in your page appear to people viewing + the page through a browser.

+ +

To set the colors and background for the current page, begin + from the Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background.
    2. +
  2. Edit any of the following properties: +
      +
    • Reader's default colors: Select this if you + want your page to use the color settings from the viewer's browser + for text and links.
      • +
    • Use custom colors: Select this if you want to + specify the colors of text and links. For each element, select a color + from the Color selection dialog. Sample output for each type of link + appears in the pane on the right.
      • +
    • Background image: Select this if you want the + background of your page to be an image. Type the name of the image + file or click Choose File to locate the image file on your hard + drive or network. + +

      Note: Background images are tiled and override + background color selections.

      +
      • +
    • URL is relative to page location: If checked, + Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page's location. + This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages on a web + server so that others can view them. + +

      Using relative URLs allows you to keep all your linked files in + the same place relative to each other, regardless of their location + on your hard disk or a web server.

      + +

      Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a + full (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking + to images on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard + disk).

      + +

      If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in + order to enable this checkbox.

      +
      • +
    +
    3. +
+ +

Note: To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, + click Advanced Edit to display the + Advanced Property + Editor.

+ +

You can also set the default page + background and colors for every new page you create in Composer.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating Links in Composer

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Creating Links Within the Same + Page

+ +

To create a link within the same page, for example a link that the reader + can use to jump from one section to another, you must create an + anchor (target location), and then create a link that points to the + anchor. Anchors are also called named anchors. To create an anchor, + follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of a line where you + want to create an anchor, or select some text.
    2. +
  2. Open the Insert menu and choose Named Anchor. You see the Named Anchor + Properties dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Type a unique name for the anchor in the Anchor Name field (up to 30 + characters). If you include spaces, they will be converted to underscores + ( _ ). If you selected some text in step 1, this box already contains a + name.
    4. +
  4. Click OK. An anchor icon appears in your document to mark the + anchor's location: +
    5. +
+ +

To create the link on which readers can click to jump to the object:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.
    2. +
  2. Click the Link button or open the Insert menu and choose Link. You see + the Link Properties dialog box. +
      +
    • If you're creating a link to an HTML file on your computer, + click Choose File to locate it.
      • +
    • If you're creating a link to a named anchor (target), select + it from the list of the anchors currently available in the page.
      • +
    • If you're creating a link to a level heading (for example, + Heading 1 - Heading 6), select it from the list of headings currently + available in the page.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click OK.
    4. +
+ +

Note: To test the link you just created, open the File + menu and choose Browse Page, then click the link.

+ +

Tip: If you did not first create named anchors, you can + use the Link dialog box to create links to headings that already occur in + the page.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + + +

You can create links from your page to local pages on your own computer or + on your workplace's network, or to remote pages on the Internet.

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your page + before you create links to other pages. This allows Composer to automatically + use relative references for links once you create them.

+ +

To create a link to another page:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want to create a link, or + select the text or image that you want to link to the anchor.
    2. +
  2. Click the Link button. You see the Link Properties dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Define your link: +
      +
    • Link text: If you've already selected an image + file or text before clicking the Link button, the selected text or + file will be entered here. Otherwise, you must enter the text that you + want to use as the link.
      • +
    • Link Location: Type the local path and filename or + remote URL of the page you want to link to. If you're not sure of + the path and filename for a local file, click Choose File to look for + it on your hard disk or network. For remote URLs, you can copy the URL + from the browser's Location Bar. Alternatively, you can select a + named anchor or a heading in the current page that you want to link + to.
      • +
    • URL is relative to page location: If checked, + Composer converts the URL to be relative to the page's location. + This is especially useful if you plan to publish your pages to a web + server so that others can view them. Using relative URLs allows you to + keep all your linked files in the same place relative to each other, + regardless of their location on your hard disk or a web server. + +

      Deselecting this option causes Composer to convert the URL to a full + (absolute) URL. You typically use absolute URLs when linking to pages + on other web servers (not stored locally on your hard disk).

      + +

      If you have unsaved changes, you must first save the page in order + to enable this checkbox. (This checkbox is not available if you open + the Link Properties dialog box in a message compose window.)

      +
      • +
    • Attach the source of this link to the message: If + checked, the source of the specified link is added as an attachment to + the message you are sending. If unchecked, just a link to the location + is inserted instead. (This checkbox is only available if you open the + Link Properties dialog box in a message compose window.)
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. To apply additional attributes or JavaScript events, click Advanced Edit + to display the + Advanced Property Editor. +
    5. +
  5. Click OK.
    6. +
  6. To test the link you just created, click the Browse button and then click + the link to make sure it works as expected.
    7. +
+ +

Tip: You can copy a link quickly by clicking and dragging + the link from another window and then dropping it onto your page. For + example, you can click and drag a link from a web page, bookmark, or Mail + window and drop it onto your page. You can also right-click + or, if you have a one-button mouse, Ctrl-click a link on a + web page and choose Copy Link Location from the menu. Then you can paste the + link location into the Link Location field in the Link Properties dialog + box.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + + +

You can make images, such as JPEG, GIF, or PNG files, behave like links in + your pages. When the reader clicks a linked image, the browser window + displays the page that the image is linked to.

+ +

To make an image behaving like a link:

+ +
    +
  1. Select an image on your page.
    2. +
  2. Click the Link button + + on the toolbar, or open the Insert menu and choose Link.
    3. +
  3. Use the Link Properties dialog box to link the image to a + named anchor or heading + within the page, or to a + separate local or remote page. +
    4. +
+ +

Tip: Drag and drop a linked image from the browser window + into a Composer window to copy both the image and the link.

+ +

Note: To remove the blue border that can appear around + images used as links:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the linked image.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Image and Link Properties.
    3. +
  3. In the dialog box, select the Link tab.
    4. +
  4. Uncheck Show border around linked image.
    5. +
  5. Click OK.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + + +

To remove a link:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the linked text (normally blue and underlined) or image.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Remove Links.
    3. +
+ +

To discontinue a link, so that text you type after the link is not included + as part of the link:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to place the insertion point where you want the link to end.
    2. +
  2. Open the Format menu and choose Discontinue Link.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Publishing Your Pages on the Web

+ +

If your pages exist only on your local hard disk, you can browse your pages, + but no one else can. Composer lets you publish your pages to a remote + computer called a web server.

+ +

When you publish your pages to a web server, Composer copies (uploads) your + pages to a computer that lets others browse your pages. Most ISPs provide + space on their web servers for web page publishing. To find a web server + where you can publish your pages, ask your ISP, help desk, or system + administrator.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Publishing a Document

+ +

Tip: It's best to first save or publish your page + before you insert links or images into it. This allows Composer to + automatically use relative references for links and images once you insert + them.

+ +

To publish a document:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the HTML document that you want to publish, or create a new Composer + document.
    2. +
  2. When you're ready to publish the document remotely, click the + Publish button. + +

    If you have published this document before, Composer remembers the + document's publishing settings and starts publishing the document. + While publishing is in progress, Composer displays a publishing status + dialog box.

    +
      +
    • If you have never published this document before, Composer displays + the Settings tab in the Publish Page dialog box so you can enter + information about the document's remote publishing location. See + Publish Page - Settings for more + information. When you're done entering information, click Publish. +
      • +
    • If you have never saved the document, Composer displays the Publish + tab in the Publish Page dialog box, so you can enter the + document's filename. See + Publish Page - Publish for more + information. After entering the filename, click Publish.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. To browse your published page, click the Browse button. Test the + page's links and make sure there are no missing images.
    4. +
  4. Continue editing the page as necessary. When you're ready to update + the remote page with your changes, click the Publish button.
    5. +
+ +

When you publish a document for the first time, Composer changes the + document's file:/// URL to an http:// URL to indicate + that you are now editing the published document. If you want to save the + document locally (on your computer's hard disk), click the Save button. + You'll be prompted to choose a filename and location on your hard disk + for the document.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + + + + +

For more troubleshooting tips, see + Solving Common Publishing + Problems. +

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Updating a Published Document

+ +

To update a published document:

+ +
    +
  1. In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then + select the document from the list.

    Alternatively, browse to the location + of the document you want to update by entering the document's HTTP + address (the document's web address) in the browser's + Location Bar.

    2. +
  2. Edit the document as necessary.
    3. +
  3. When you're ready to update the remote page with your changes, click + Publish in Composer's toolbar.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: To delete a page or image you've published on a + web server, you must use an FTP (File Transfer + Protocol) program. You also must use an FTP program if you want to create + subdirectories or to rename files on the web server. Ask your service + provider if they recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find + information on FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service + provider's website. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites + such as ZDNet Downloads.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Changing the Filename or + Publishing Location

+ +

To change a document's filename or publishing location:

+ +
    +
  1. In a Composer window, open the File menu, and choose Recent Pages, then + select the document from the list. + +

    Alternatively, browse to the location of the document you want to update + by entering the document's HTTP address (the document's web + address) in the browser's Location Bar.

    +
    2. +
  2. Edit the document as necessary.
    3. +
  3. Open Composer's File menu and choose Publish As. Composer displays + the Publish tab in the Publish Page dialog box.
    4. +
  4. Enter a different page title, if necessary.
    5. +
  5. Enter a different filename for the page, if necessary.
    6. +
  6. From the Site Name list, choose the publishing location you want to use. + To set up a new publishing location, click New Site. See + Publish Page - Settings for more + information.
    7. +
  7. Click Publish to save the document to the new location.
    8. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Creating a New Publishing Site

+ +

If you plan to publish documents to more than one remote location, you can + set up Composer to save the publishing information for each remote site you + use, so that you don't have to enter it each time you want to + publish.

+ +

To create a new publishing site, begin from a Composer window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer + displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click New Site.
    3. +
  3. For Site Name, enter the nickname by which you want to refer to + this publishing site. + +

    For example, if you will use the new site to publish documents + related to the Meteor project, you might want to use the site + name Meteor. Site names remind you about the types of documents + you publish at each site.

    +
    4. +
  4. For Publishing address, enter the complete URL provided to + you by your ISP, system administrator, or web hosting service. This + URL must begin with either ftp:// or http://. + +

    The publishing address specifies the location where documents are + published (uploaded) at this site. If you are not sure what to enter, + ask your ISP or system administrator.

    +
    5. +
  5. For HTTP address of your home page, enter the complete URL + that you would enter in the browser to view pages at this + site. Do not include a filename or subdirectory as part of the URL. + +

    This URL must always begin with http://. In some cases, + this URL is the same as the publishing address. If you are not sure + what to enter, ask your ISP or system administrator, or else leave + it blank.

    +
    6. +
  6. For user name, enter the user name you use to log in to your ISP + or web hosting service.
    7. +
  7. For password, enter the password for your user name.
    8. +
  8. Select Save Password to save your password securely using + Password Manager so that you don't have to enter it each time you + publish pages at this site.
    9. +
  9. Click OK.
    10. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Choosing the Default Publishing + Site

+ +

If you have set up more than one publishing site, but you typically use + only one site for most of your publishing needs, you can designate the site + you use most often as the default publishing site. Composer will use the + default publishing site for all documents that you publish, unless you + specifically choose an alternate site.

+ +

Regardless of how many sites you've set up, you can always publish a + document to a different site by choosing Publish As from Composer's + File menu. See + Changing the Filename + or Publishing Location for more information.

+ +

To choose the default publishing site, begin from a Composer + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. + Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select a publishing site from the list. + +

    If you only have one publishing site set up, Composer uses that + one as the default site.

    +
    3. +
  3. Click Set as Default.
    4. +
  4. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    5. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Deleting a Publishing Site

+ +

Deleting a publishing site removes the site's settings from Composer. + If you later wish to publish to the site, you must re-enter the site's + settings.

+ +

To delete a publishing site's settings, begin from a Composer + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Publishing Site Settings. Composer + displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select a publishing site from the list.
    3. +
  3. Click Remove Site. + +

    Composer only removes the site's settings; the remote site itself + is not affected.

    +
    4. +
  4. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    5. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Solving Common Publishing + Problems

+ +

If one or more of your files fail to publish, the Publishing + Status dialog box displays an error message that can help you + determine what went wrong and how to fix it.

+ +

If you are still unable to publish a file, save the file to your + hard disk by opening Composer's File menu, and choosing Save. You + can then open the file at a later time to try to publish it. To + quickly locate the file later, open Composer's File menu, and + choose Recent Pages.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Verifying Your Publishing + Settings

+ +

To verify your publishing settings:

+ +
    +
  1. Close the Publishing Status dialog box, if it is open.
    2. +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings.
    3. +
  3. In the Publish Settings dialog box, confirm that the site settings are + correct for the site you are trying to publish to. If you're not + sure, check with your ISP or web hosting service. +
      +
    • Verify that you correctly entered the publishing + settings: You may have accidentally mis-typed one of the + settings.
      • +
    • Verify that you entered the correct publishing + address: Web hosting services or ISPs may refer to the + publishing address as the server name, the hostname, or + the server/host. They often specify the publishing location as + ftp.myisp.com/username, where username is your + user name. + +

      For the publishing address to be correct, you must precede the + publishing location with either ftp:// or http://. + For example, the correct publishing address for the above-mentioned + site would be ftp://ftp.myisp.com/username.

      +
      • +
    +
    4. +
+ +

Checking Your Filenames

+ +

Examine the names of any files that failed to publish. Make sure that the + filenames:

+ + + +

Fixing Publishing Errors

+ +

If one or more of your files fails to publish, look at the messages + Composer displays in the Publishing Status area of the Publishing dialog box. + You can use these error messages to help determine what went wrong and what + to do to fix the problem.

+ +
+

Error Messages:

+

Filename not found.

+

X of Y files failed to + publish.

+

The subdirectory directory name + doesn't exist on this site or the filename filename is + already in use by another subdirectory.

+

The filename filename is + already in use by another subdirectory.

+

The server is not available. Check your + connection and try again later.

+

You do not have permission to publish to this + location.

+

You are currently offline. Click the icon + near the lower-right corner of any window to go online.

+

There is not enough disk space available to + save the file filename.

+

The filename or subdirectory name is too + long.

+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ +
+ Filename not found. +

or

+ X of Y files failed to publish. +
+ +

Error Description: One or more image files or CSS files + failed to publish because Composer could not find them. Some typical + reasons might be:

+ +
    +
  • The file location you typed is incorrect.
    • +
  • The file's location on the web is not accessible.
    • +
  • The file's location was changed or the file was deleted or + moved to another location.
    • +
+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ +
    +
  • Look for broken images in the page you are trying to publish. Broken + images will appear with this icon + in the + page. To correct the image's address, double-click the broken + image to display the Image Properties dialog box so you can enter the + correct address.
    • +
  • Remove the broken image from the page by selecting it (click once on + the image), and then pressing Backspace or Delete + on your keyboard.
    • +
  • If the image is unavailable because the server where the image resides + is inaccessible, try publishing the page at a later time.
    • +
  • If the missing file is a CSS file, you must first verify the correct + location of the CSS file. To fix the file's address in Composer, + click the HTML Source tab and edit the file's location in the HTML + source code. You should only edit the HTML source if you are familiar + with HTML tags.
    • +
+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ +
+ The subdirectory directory name doesn't exist on this + site or the filename filename is already in use by another + subdirectory +

or

+ The filename filename is already in use by another + subdirectory +
+ +

Error Description: You specified the name of a remote + subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing site. Composer can only + publish to a remote subdirectory that already exists at the publishing + location. Or, you specified a filename that is identical to the name of an + existing subdirectory at the publishing site.

+ +

For example, in the Publish Page dialog box, under the Publish tab:

+ +
    +
  • for Site subdirectory for this page, you may have typed the name + of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing location.
    • +
  • you checked Include images and other files, and then you typed + the name of a subdirectory that does not exist at the publishing + location.
    • +
  • one of the files you are attempting to publish has the same name as a + subdirectory at the publishing site.
    • +
+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ +
    +
  • Use a separate FTP program if you want to create, rename, or delete + subdirectories at the publishing site. Ask your service provider if they + recommend a particular FTP program. You can usually find information on + FTP programs in the Help or Support sections of your service + provider's website. FTP programs are also available from shareware + sites such as ZDNet Downloads.
    • +
  • Don't use subdirectory names that end with .html or + .htm. Only your Composer filenames should end with .html + or .htm.
    • +
  • Subdirectory names are case-sensitive, so be sure to enter a + subdirectory name exactly as it appears at the publishing location.
    • +
+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ +
+ The server is not available. Check your connection and try again + later. +
+ +

Error Description: This error can have many causes. For + example:

+ +
    +
  • Your publishing site settings may not be correct.
    • +
  • Your Internet connection may have been lost.
    • +
  • Your modem or other equipment that you use to connect to the Internet + might not be functioning correctly.
    • +
  • The web server that you are trying to publish to might be unavailable + due to a technical problem or to an unknown circumstance.
    • +
  • Your ISP or web hosting service may be experiencing technical + problems.
    • +
+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ +
    +
  • Verify that your publishing settings are correct and that you entered + them correctly. See + Verifying Your Publishing + Settings for more information.
    • +
  • Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a + web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can + successfully view the page http://www.mozilla.org.
    • +
  • If your Internet connection is not working, verify that all hardware, + telephone connections, modems, and network connections are functioning + properly.
    • +
  • Use the browser to try to view a page at the website you are + attempting to publish to. If you can successfully view other websites but + cannot view a page at the publishing site, your ISP or web hosting + service may be experiencing technical problems.
    • +
  • Try publishing again later. Your ISP, web hosting service, or the web + server may be experiencing temporary technical difficulties.
    • +
+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ +
+ You do not have permission to publish to this location. +
+ +

Error Description: You are attempting to publish to a + location that you are not authorized to use. You can only publish to sites + where you have been granted access by your ISP or web hosting service.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ +
    +
  • Verify that you entered the correct user name and password in the + Publishing Site Settings dialog box, or in the Publish tab of the + Publish dialog box.
    • +
  • Contact your ISP to find out where you can publish your pages at their + site.
    • +
  • Find a web hosting service that you can use to publish your pages. In + the browser, search for web hosting.
    • +
+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ +
+ You are currently offline. Click the icon near the lower-right corner + of any window to go online. +
+ +

Error Description: You are attempting to publish, but + your &brandShortName; Internet connection is currently in the + offline state. Your Internet connection must be in the online + state (connected to the Internet) in order to publish your pages.

+ +

Verify that your Internet connection is currently offline by looking at + the online/offline icon in the lower right corner of any &brandShortName; + window. If you are currently offline, the icon appears as + .

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ +
    +
  • Click the online/offline icon to go online. In the online state, the + icon should look like this: + .
    • +
  • Make sure your Internet connection is working by attempting to view a + web page using the browser. For example, confirm that you can + successfully view the page http://www.mozilla.org.
    • +
+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ +
+ There is not enough disk space available to save the file + filename. +
+ +

Error Description: The remote web server's hard + disk is full, or you may have exceeded the amount of disk space allocated + to you by your ISP or web hosting service.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ +
    +
  • Use a separate FTP program to delete unnecessary files at your + publishing site. Ask your service provider if they recommend a + particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP programs + in the Help or Support sections of your service provider's website. + FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such as ZDNet + Downloads.
    • +
  • Find out from your ISP or web hosting service about increasing your + disk space allocation, or switch to a different service that can satisfy + your needs.
    • +
  • If the web server is located at your company or school, contact the + network administrator to find out if you can publish to a different + location that has more disk space, or if you can request that + additional disk space be allocated to your current publishing + location.
    • +
+
+ +
+

Error Message:

+ +
+ The filename or subdirectory name is too long. +
+ +

Error Description: The number of characters in the + filename or the subdirectory name is not supported by the web server + computer that you are trying to publish to.

+ +

Possible Solutions:

+ +
    +
  • Limit the length of your filenames and subdirectory names to less than + 32 characters. Some operating systems do not support names longer than 32 + characters.
    • +
+
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Publishing Settings

+ +

This section describes Composer's publishing settings. For + information on Composer's general and new page settings, see + Composer Preferences.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Publish Page - Publish

+ +

The Publish Page - Publish tab lets you specify where you want + to publish a document. These settings apply to the current + document.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Publish tab, + follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page + dialog box appears.
    2. +
  2. Click the Publish tab.
    3. +
+ + + +

Tip: To create remote subdirectories or delete + published pages or images, you must use an FTP (File Transfer + Protocol) program. Ask your service provider if they recommend a + particular FTP program. You can usually find information on FTP + programs in the Help or Support sections of your service provider's + website. FTP programs are also available from shareware sites such + as ZDNet Downloads.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Publish Page - Settings

+ +

The Publish Page - Settings tab lets you specify your login information for + the remote publishing site, as well as the publishing settings for the remote + site. These settings apply to the current document and any other files you + publish to this location.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Page - Settings tab, follow + these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Publish As. The Publish Page dialog box + appears.
    2. +
  2. Click the Settings tab.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Publish Settings

+ +

The Publish Settings dialog box lets you create, edit, and + delete publishing site settings, and also lets you set the default + publishing site.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Publish Settings dialog box, + follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Publishing Site Settings. + Composer displays the Publish Settings dialog box.
    2. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Composer Preferences

+ +

This section describes the settings in the Composer preferences panel. If + you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Double-click the Composer category to expand the list.
    3. +
+ +

For information on Composer's publishing settings, see + Publishing Settings.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Composer Preferences - Composer

+ +

Composer preferences allow you to specify settings for saving files and for + table editing. These settings apply to every document you create.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Composer preferences, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Composer category.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Composer Preferences - New Page Settings

+ +

New page preferences allow you to specify settings for colors and + background images that apply to every document you create.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the New Page Settings, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Double-click the Composer category and click New Page Settings.
    3. +
+ + + +

To change the author name for an individual page: Open the Format menu and + choose Page Title and Properties.

+ +

To change the page colors and background image for an individual page: Open + the Format menu and choose Page Colors and Background.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..08d098cad9 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_advanced.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,751 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +&brandShortName; Advanced Preferences Help + + + + +

Advanced Preferences

+ +

This section describes how to use the Advanced preferences panel. If you are + not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Advanced category.
    3. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Advanced Preferences - Advanced

+ +

This section describes how to use the main Advanced preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Advanced category.
    3. +
+ +

The main Advanced preferences panel allows you to:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Scripts & + Plugins

+ +

This section describes how to use the Scripts & Plugins preferences + panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Plugins. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Scripts & Plugins preferences panel allows you to control how + JavaScript and plugins are used:

+ + + +

For more information about plugins, see + Plugins and Downloads. +

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Keyboard Navigation

+ +

This section describes how to use the Keyboard Navigation preferences + panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Keyboard Navigation. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Keyboard Navigation preferences panel allows you to control how you use + the keyboard to navigate in web pages:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Find As You Type

+ +

This section describes how to use the Find As You Type references + panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Find As You Type. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Find As You Type preferences panel allows you to control how you use + the keyboard to search for text in web pages:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Cache

+ +

This section describes how to use the Cache preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Cache preferences panel allows you to adjust the &brandShortName; memory + and disk cache:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Offline Apps

+ +

This section describes how to use the Offline Web Applications preferences + panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Offline Apps. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Offline Web Applications panel allows you to control and monitor how + websites use &brandShortName;'s offline storage. Websites can provide + complex functionality beyond just the presentation of content, implementing + web applications. In general, + such web applications require you to stay online in order to use them, thus + won't function when you are disconnected from the network (offline). + If permitted, websites can store their content and any data you entered + locally in &brandShortName;. In this way, web applications can be used even + without a network connection.

+ +

The Offline Web Content and User Data section provides the + following functions:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Proxies

+ +

This section describes how to use the Proxies preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Proxies. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Proxies preferences panel allows you to set up &brandShortName; to use a + proxy:

+ +

Before you start: Ask your network administrator if you + have a proxy configuration file or for the names and port numbers of the + proxy.

+ + + +

Advanced Proxy Preferences

+ +

If you want to use different proxies for different protocols or need to use + a SOCKS proxy:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - HTTP Networking

+ +

This section describes how to use the HTTP Networking preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click HTTP Networking. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The HTTP Networking preferences panel is used to configure HTTP-based + networking:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Software + Installation

+ +

This section describes how to use the Software Installation preferences + panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Software Installation. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Software Installation preferences panel is used to enable add-on + installation and updates. The Add-ons Manager allows you to view and manage + all your installed extensions and themes.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Mouse Wheel

+ +

This section describes how to use the Mouse Wheel preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Mouse Wheel. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Mouse Wheel preferences panel allows you to control how the mouse wheel + on your mouse (in between your mouse buttons) is used in &brandShortName;. + Modern mice may have two wheels or a button that can be used to switch the + scroll direction of the wheel. The behaviour for the vertical wheel function + is set in the upper panel Vertical scrolling while the + horizontal mode is controlled by the lower panel Horizontal + scrolling.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Advanced Preferences - Debugging

+ +

This section describes how to use the Debugging preferences panel. If you are + not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Debugging. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Debugging preferences panel allows you to control various preferences + relating to XUL rendering and debugging events including reflow ones. Some + preferences only take affect once &brandShortName; has been restarted:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8c7996c1fc --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_appearance.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,369 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +&brandShortName; Appearance Preferences Help + + + + +

Appearance Preferences

+ +

This section describes how to use the Appearance preference panel. If you + are not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Double-click Appearance to expand the list, then click the name for the + preferences you want to view.
    3. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Appearance Preferences - Appearance

+ +

This section describes how to use the Appearance preferences panels. If + you're not already viewing one of these panels, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Appearance category.
    3. +
+ +

The Appearance preferences panel allows you to set &brandShortName; startup + options and customize the user interface:

+ + + +

Note: You must restart &brandShortName; for a change in + language or formatting settings to take effect. In many cases, the choices + will show the same language unless you have additional language pack(s) + installed or use a localized version of &brandShortName; for a language + which is different from your operating-system's settings.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Appearance Preferences - Content

+ +

This section describes how to use the Content preferences panel. + If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, click Content. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Appearance to expand the + list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Content preferences panel allows you to change settings that influence + how website and message content appears in &brandShortName;.

+ + + +

Note: See the separate preferences panels for colors, fonts + and languages to further customize content appearance and the Privacy & + Security section for privacy-related settings that also might influence how + content appears to you.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Appearance Preferences - Fonts

+ +

This section describes how to use the Fonts preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Fonts preferences panel allows you to set page font type and size.

+ +

Note: Some font styles may not be selectable because the + selected language does not have fonts available for that style.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Appearance Preferences - Colors

+ +

This section describes how to use the Colors preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, click Colors. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Colors preferences panel allows you to set the background and text + colors on web pages, mail/news messages, and feeds:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Appearance Preferences - Media

+ +

This section describes how to use the Media preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, click Media. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Media preferences panel allows you to determine how to handle audio and + video content as well as image animation:

+ + + +

Note: This options apply to HTML5 media and animated images + (e.g., GIF or PNG) only, thus not to any media handled by a plugin.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Appearance Preferences - Spelling

+ +

This section describes how to use the Spelling preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, click Spelling. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Spelling preferences panel allows you to determine how spelling is + handled throughout &brandShortName;:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3c33b3cc4f --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_nav_prefs_navigator.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,716 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +&brandShortName; Browser Preferences Help + + + + +

Browser Preferences

+ +

This section describes how to use the Browser preference panel. If + you're not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Choose Browser.
    3. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ + + +

This section describes how to use the main browser preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Browser category.
    3. +
+ +

The Browser preferences panel allows you to customize certain aspects of + the browser.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Browser Preferences - History

+ +

This section describes how to use the History preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click History. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The History preferences panel allows you to configure the history settings + for the browser.

+ + + +

For more information about history in &brandShortName;, see + Retracing Your Steps.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Browser Preferences - Languages

+ +

This section describes how to use the Languages preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Languages. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Languages preferences panel allows you to choose the languages and + text encoding for displaying web pages:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Browser Preferences - Helper Applications

+ +

This section describes how to use the Helper Applications preferences panel. + If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Helper Applications. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Helper Applications preferences panel lets you choose applications and + other handlers to handle different types of content (e.g. PDF documents). + It shows you a list of content types and lets you select a handler for each + type. To filter the list, use the search field. Text entered in there will + narrow the list to entries containing that text either in the type description + or the currently selected action.

+

You can choose a local application to handle any type. For some types, you + can also choose a web application + to handle the type, choose a plugin in + &brandShortName; to handle the type, or save the type on your computer.

+

To choose a handler for a type, select the type from the list. The current + handler for the type will turn into a menu. Open the menu and select the + handler you want to handle the type. Depending on the actual type, you can:

+ + + +

Some systems have a native application chooser, which help you select + suitable applications to handle different types of content:

+ +
    +
  • Use native application chooser when available: Select + this to enable the native application chooser when it is available.
    • +
+ + +

Note: When a plugin is available to handle a type, and you + choose another handler for that type, &brandShortName; will only use your + chosen handler when you access the type directly. When the type is embedded + inside a web page, &brandShortName; will continue to use the plugin to handle + it. See also + Plugins and Downloads. +

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Browser Preferences - Location Bar

+ +

This section describes how to use the Location Bar preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Location Bar. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Location Bar Preferences panel lets you fine-tune the behavior of the + Location Bar.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + +

This section describes how to use the Internet Search preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Internet Search preferences panel allows you to configure how you search + using &brandShortName;:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Browser Preferences - Tabbed Browsing

+ +

This section describes how to use the Tabbed Browsing preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Tabbed Browsing. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Tabbed Browsing preferences panel allows you to set up Tabbed + Browsing:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + +

This section describes how to use the Link Behavior preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Link Behavior. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Link Behavior preferences panel allows you to configure how links are + opened in &brandShortName;:

+ + + +
+

To ensure that &brandShortName; opens a new window, select the Browser + option in Appearance + Preferences - Appearance.

+ +

If you want &brandShortName; to open a new tab instead of a new window when + you launch it and it is already running, ensure the following:

+ +
    +
  • If &brandShortName; is launched from the command line, no command line + parameters that open windows (like -new-window) are used.
    • +
  • No When &brandShortName; starts up, open option is set in + Appearance Preferences + - Appearance.
    • +
  • The Links from other applications preference is set to A new + tab in the current window.
    • +
+
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Browser Preferences - Downloads

+ +

This section describes how to use the Downloads preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Downloads. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Downloads preferences panel allows you to set up how &brandShortName; + handles files you download from web pages:

+ + + + + + + + + +

For more information about downloading files from web pages, see + Plugins and + Downloads.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..42046f17a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/cs_priv_prefs_popup.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +&brandShortName; Popup Blocking Help + + + + +
This document is provided for your information only. + It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of + your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, + address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a + recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security + protection on the Internet.
+ +

Controlling Popups

+ +

What are Popups?

+ +

Pop-up windows, or popups, are windows that appear automatically and without + your permission. They vary in size, but usually don't cover the whole + screen. Some popups open on top of the current browser window, thus popping + up, while others appear underneath the browser (popunders).

+ +

&brandShortName; allows you to control both popups and popunders through the + Popup Windows + preferences panel. Since popup blocking is turned off by default, you + must enable it to prevent popups from appearing in the browser.

+ +

When blocking a popup, &brandShortName; can be set up to play a sound or + display an icon + Popup control + icon in the status bar or a notification bar at the top of the website + content area, or any combination of the above. You can use the icon or the + bar to add a website you're viewing to an exceptions list so that the + website is allowed to again display popups.

+ +

Blocking popups may interfere with some websites: Some + websites, including some banking sites, use popups for important features. + Blocking all popups disables such features. To allow specific websites to + use popups, while blocking all others, you can add specific websites to the + list of allowed websites. For more information, see + Privacy & + Security Preferences - Popup Windows.

+ +

Blocking popups doesn't always work: Although + &brandShortName; blocks most popups, some websites, even when blocked, may + use other methods to show popups.

+ +

Allowing popups from certain websites: After you've + enabled popup blocking, you can still allow specific websites to display + popups. Browse to the website, and then from the Tools menu, choose Popup + Manager, and then choose Allow Popups From This Website.

+ +

The next section describes how to control popups through preferences and + through the popup control icon.

+ +

Privacy & Security + Preferences - Popup Windows

+ +

This section describes how to use the Popup Windows preferences panel. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the + &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security Preferences category, click Popup + Windows. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & + Security to expand the list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

When a popup window has been blocked

+ + + +

Using the popup control icon or notification bar to add allowed + websites: You can use the popup control icon or notification bar to + quickly add a website to the list of allowed websites. Click the icon + Popup control + icon to open the list of allowed websites. The current website is + already filled in. Click Allow and then click OK to confirm your addition. + Similarly you can use the notification bar to allow popups from the current + website or open the list of allowed websites through Manage Popups. Just + click the Preferences button at the right end of the notification bar.

+ +

Note: Blocking popups may not always work and may interfere + with some websites. For more information about blocking popups, see + Controlling Popups.

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..149e6ef124 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/customize_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,1451 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Customizing &brandShortName; + + + + +
This document is provided for your information + only. It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security + of your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, + however, address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it + represent a recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and + security protection on the Internet.
+ +

Customizing &brandShortName;

+ +

You can customize &brandShortName; to better suit your needs using features + like Sidebar, bookmarks, Tabbed Browsing, and Add-ons.

+ +

This section describes the customizable aspects of &brandShortName;'s + browser component.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ + + +
In this section: + +
+ +

What is Sidebar?

+ +

Sidebar is a customizable area in your browser where you can keep items + that you need to use all the time, including your bookmarks, browser history, + address book, and other available options. Sidebar presents these items to + you in tabs that are continually updated.

+ +

&brandShortName; comes with some Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can + customize Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Opening, Closing and Resizing + Sidebar

+ +

To open Sidebar, press F9 or open the + View menu in the browser, choose Show/Hide, and then Sidebar from the + submenu.

+ +

Once Sidebar is opened, you can use its handle to close, open and resize + Sidebar's frame. Move the mouse pointer up and down along the left edge + of the &brandShortName; window. The pointer changes to a hand when it touches + the handle for Sidebar, as shown in the picture.

+ + + + + + + + + +
image of sidebar with + handle +

Sidebar
Handle

+
+ + + +

To close Sidebar with its handle, do one of the following:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Viewing Sidebar Tabs

+ +

To view a tab:

+ + + +

Tip: To reload a Sidebar tab, right-click on the tab title + and choose Reload from the pop-up menu.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Adding Sidebar Tabs

+ +

To add a new tab:

+ +
    +
  1. Click Tabs at the top of Sidebar, and select Customize + Sidebar from the menu
    2. +
  2. In the Customize Sidebar dialog box, select a tab from the list on the + left. Double-click the folders to open or close folders.
    3. +
  3. Click Add.
    4. +
  4. Continue adding as many tabs as you want.
    5. +
  5. Click OK to finish.
    6. +
+ +

Note: If you add more than eight tabs to Sidebar, + &brandShortName; hides the remaining tabs to reduce clutter. To scroll + through the hidden tabs, click the down arrow button at the bottom of Sidebar + until you see the desired tab. Click the up arrow button to once again scroll + up.

+ +

Tips:

+ + + +

You can also turn Sidebar tabs on and off.

+ +
    +
  1. Click Tabs at the top of Sidebar. Current tabs are listed in + the lower part of the menu.
    2. +
  2. Select the tabs you want displayed in Sidebar. Remove the checkmark + (deselect) to turn a tab off (it will still be available from the + menu).
    3. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly turn off a Sidebar tab, right-click on its + name and choose Hide Tab.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Customizing Individual Sidebar + Tabs

+ +

Note: Not all tabs can be customized.

+ +
    +
  1. Click Tabs at the top of Sidebar and select Customize Sidebar + from the menu.
    2. +
  2. Select an available tab from the list on the right.
    3. +
  3. Click Customize Tab if it is enabled. A window appears with information + and options for customizing the tab. + +

    The instructions vary depending on the source of the tab—in + addition to &brandShortName;, tab providers can be any company, + organization, or individual who uses the Internet.

    +
    4. +
  4. After you follow the tab provider's instructions, close the + customization window (or follow the provider's instructions to close + it).
    5. +
  5. Click OK to finish.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Reorganizing Sidebar Tabs

+ +
    +
  1. Click Tabs at the top of Sidebar and select Customize Sidebar from + the menu.
    2. +
  2. Select a tab from the list on the right.
    3. +
  3. Click Up and Down to change the tab's placement.
    4. +
  4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to continue reorganizing as many tabs as you + like.
    5. +
  5. Click OK to finish.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Removing Sidebar Tabs

+ +
    +
  1. Click Tabs at the top of Sidebar and select Customize Sidebar from + the menu.
    2. +
  2. Select a tab from the list on the right.
    3. +
  3. Click Remove.
    4. +
  4. Continue removing as many tabs as you like.
    5. +
  5. Click OK to finish.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Tabbed Browsing

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

What is Tabbed Browsing?

+ +

Tabbed Browsing lets you open more than one web page in a single window. + Each web page has its own tab across the top of a single browser window. + Each tab appears on the Tab Bar. For example, you can visit mozilla.org, + icq.com, and cnn.com within one window instead of three windows.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Click this to open a new tab.
+ tab bar +
Tab being viewed.Click this to close the tab being + viewed.
Tab Bar
+ +

You don't need to have several windows open to visit several web pages; + thus, freeing up more space on your desktop. Instead, you can open, close, + and reload web pages conveniently in one place without having to switch to + another window.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Setting up Tabbed Browsing

+ +

There are several ways to customize Tabbed Browsing. For example, you can + change your preferences to open new browser tabs from the Location Bar. You + can set up Tabbed Browsing in other ways too, such as loading new browser + tabs in the background so the first page is kept on top while the second page + is loading. To learn more about setting up Tabbed Browsing in + &brandShortName;, see + Browser Preferences + - Tabbed Browsing.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Opening Tabs

+ +

You can open a browser tab in the following ways:

+ +

Opening a New Blank Browser Tab:

+ + + +

Opening a Web Page Link in a Browser Tab:

+ + + +

Tips:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Moving Tabs

+ +

Tabs are displayed in the order you open them, which may not always be what + you want. To move a tab to a different location within a &brandShortName; + window, simply drag it there using your mouse. While you are dragging the + tab, &brandShortName; displays an indicator to show where the tab will be + moved. Alternately, you can use + keyboard + shortcuts to move tabs within a window if desired.

+ +

Note: The keyboard shortcuts don't work when a text + box has focus.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Bookmarking Tabs

+ +

To bookmark the group of browser tabs in the current window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Bookmark This Group of + Tabs.
    2. +
  2. Type a name for the bookmark group in the Name field.
    3. +
  3. Choose an existing folder in which to create the bookmark group, or click + New Folder to create a new folder.
    4. +
  4. Click Add Bookmarks to add the bookmarks.
    5. +
+ +

The bookmark group will be saved as a folder, with the name you entered in + the Name field, inside the folder you selected in the Folder drop-down + list.

+ +

Tip: To learn how to use a group of tabs as your home page, + see Browser Preferences - + Browser.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Closing Tabs

+ +

You can close browser tabs in several ways:

+ +

Closing the Browser Tab Being Viewed:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Click this to open a new tab.
+ tab bar +
Tab being viewed.Click this to close the tab being + viewed.
Tab Bar
+ +

Tips:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Changing Fonts, Colors, and + Themes

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Changing the Default Fonts

+ +

Normally, web pages are displayed in the default font set by your browser + or in a font chosen by the web pages' authors.

+ +

To change the default fonts:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, choose Fonts. (If no options are visible + in this category, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. From the "Fonts for" drop-down list, choose a language group/script. + For instance, to set default fonts for West European languages/script + (Latin), choose Western.
    4. +
  4. Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or + sans-serif (like Arial). Then specify the font size you want for + proportional text.
    5. +
  5. If an appropriate font is available for your language/script, select + fonts for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, Fantasy, and Monospace. You can also + specify what font size you want for monospace text.
    6. +
  6. Specify whether the default font should be serif or sans serif.
    7. +
  7. Select a fixed-width font and size. Certain types of text, such as + equations and formulas, are displayed in a fixed-width font.
    8. +
+ +

Many web page authors choose their own fonts and font sizes. To allow fonts + other than the ones specified in your preferences, check Allow + documents to use other fonts.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Changing the Default Colors

+ +

Normally, the background and text colors on web pages are determined by the + default colors set by your browser or by the pages' authors.

+ +

To change the default colors:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, choose Colors. (If no options are visible + in this category, click to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. Click the colored blocks next to Text, Background, Unvisited Links, and + Visited Links. Choose a color for each from the color chart. You can also + specify that links should be underlined.
    4. +
+ +

Most web page authors choose their own colors. You can override the + authors' intentions by selecting Use my chosen colors, ignoring + the colors specified.

+ +

When viewing the source of a web page, you can see the HTML syntax of the + source of a web page highlighted in specific colors by selecting Enable + syntax highlighting.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Changing the Theme

+ +

You can change the look and feel of &brandShortName; by using a different + theme. Changing the theme can be done either from the View menu or from the + Add-ons Manager.

+ +

From the View menu:

+ +
    +
  1. Choose Apply Theme, and then select a theme from the menu.
    2. +
  2. Quit and restart &brandShortName;.
    3. +
+ +

You can get new themes by selecting Get More Themes. This will open a new + tab or window and load the Themes webpage. Here you can download the latest + themes and apply them. Another way to install new themes is through the + Add-ons Manager (see below). Lightweight themes are applied immediately when + you select "Add to &brandShortName;".

+ +

From the Add-ons Manager:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu and choose Add-ons Manager.
    2. +
  2. Click the Appearance button in the toolbar.
    3. +
  3. Select a theme from the list, and then click the Enable button.
    4. +
  4. Restart &brandShortName; by clicking Restart Now in the + Theme's entry.
    5. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Toolbars

+ +
In this section: + +
+ + + +

The Menu Bar provides drop down menus for performing actions within + &brandShortName;.

+ + + + + + + + +
Menu Bar
Menu Bar
+ +

If the Menu Bar is hidden (not minimized; see + Hiding a Toolbar), or if you are in Full + Screen mode, press the Alt key to display the Menu Bar.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + +

The Navigation Toolbar, pictured here, helps you move around the Web.

+ + + + + + + + + + + +
+ navigation toolbar +
BackForwardReloadStop
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Bookmarks Toolbar

+ +

The Bookmarks Toolbar is completely customizable—you decide what you + want to keep there.

+ + + + + + + + +
Bookmarks Toolbar
Bookmarks Toolbar
+ +

You can easily add, delete, and rearrange items in the Bookmarks Toolbar.

+ +

Adding Bookmarks Toolbar + Bookmarks

+ +

You can add buttons for your favorite bookmarks, or folders containing + groups of bookmarks. To create a new bookmark to add to the Bookmarks + Toolbar:

+ +
    +
  1. Open a web page you want to bookmark.
    2. +
  2. Drag the bookmark icon + image of bookmark icon(located to the left of URL in the + Location Bar) to a desired place on the Bookmarks Toolbar. You can drag the + icon directly to the Bookmarks Toolbar, or to a folder on the Bookmarks + Toolbar. For more information, see + Adding Bookmark + Folders to the Bookmarks Toolbar.
    3. +
+ +

Note: The bookmark icon + image + of bookmark icon may appear as another page-specific icon if you have + checked Show Website Icons in preferences. See + Appearance Preferences - + Appearance for more information on changing this preferences.

+ +

Each item in the Bookmarks Toolbar folder appears as a toolbar button. You + may need to enlarge the browser window to see them all.

+ +

Adding + Bookmark Folders to the Bookmarks Toolbar

+ +

You can add bookmark folders to the Bookmarks Toolbar to sort your favorite + bookmarks into categories. For example, you can have one folder on the + Bookmarks Toolbar for hobby-related bookmarks and another folder for + work-related bookmarks. To add a new bookmark to the Bookmarks Toolbar:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. Select the Bookmarks Toolbar folder.
    3. +
  3. Choose New Folder from the File menu.
    4. +
  4. Type a name for your new bookmark folder. By default, the name is + New Folder.
    5. +
  5. Click Add to confirm your new bookmark folder name.
    6. +
+ +

The new bookmark folder will appear at the end of the Bookmarks Toolbar.

+ +

Removing Bookmarks from the Bookmarks Toolbar

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. Click the Bookmarks Toolbar Folder.
    3. +
  3. Select the bookmark or folder you want to delete.
    4. +
  4. Press Delete on your keyboard.
    5. +
  5. Close the Library window.
    6. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly remove a bookmark placed on the Bookmarks + Toolbar, right-click on the bookmark and select Delete.

+ +

Rearranging the Bookmarks Toolbar

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. In your Bookmarks window, click the Bookmarks Toolbar Folder.
    3. +
  3. Select a bookmark or folder and drag it to a new location.
    4. +
  4. When you are finished rearranging items, close your Bookmarks + window.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: To move a bookmark placed on the Bookmarks Toolbar + quickly, click and drag the bookmark to another location on the Bookmarks + Toolbar or to a folder.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Status Bar

+ +

The Status Bar is located at the bottom of any &brandShortName; window. It + includes the following:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Component Bar

+ +

Use the Component Bar at the bottom left of any &brandShortName; window to + switch between tasks (such as browsing or mail).

+ +

component bar

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Hiding a Toolbar

+ +

There are two ways to hide the toolbars.

+ +

To minimize a toolbar:

+ + + +

To completely hide a toolbar, including its triangle:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the View menu.
    2. +
  2. Choose Show/Hide and uncheck the toolbars you want to hide.
    3. +
+ +

To reverse this action, open the View menu, choose Show/Hide, and then + select the toolbars you want to show. You can also right-click on an empty + section on the Menu Bar, Navigation Toolbar or + Bookmarks Toolbar to turn toolbars on and off.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Bookmarks

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

What Are Bookmarks?

+ +

Bookmarks are shortcuts to your favorite and most-visited web pages. Rather + than typing in long URLs (web addresses), you can create bookmarks that take + you directly to the pages you want to see.

+ +

You access your bookmarks through the Bookmarks menu, the Bookmarks tab on + Sidebar, and the Library window. You can control what's listed + in the Bookmarks menu by adding bookmarks for your favorite web pages and + organizing your list of bookmarks any way you want.

+ +

Using Bookmarks

+ +

&brandShortName; comes with some bookmarks already available. To use a + bookmark:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu.
    2. +
  2. Choose a bookmark from the list or from a folder in the list.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating New Bookmarks

+ +

You can bookmark your favorite websites to make it easy to return to + them.

+ +

To bookmark the current page, perform one of these steps:

+ + + + + + + + + + +
Bookmarks Toolbar
Bookmarks Toolbar
+ + + +

Notes:

+ + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Organizing Your Bookmarks

+ +

To organize your bookmarks, open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage + Bookmarks. Perform any of the following tasks in your Library window.

+ +

To view bookmarks inside of folders:

+ + + +

To move a bookmark or a folder to another location in the list:

+ + + +

To create a new folder or separator:

+ + + +

To remove a bookmark or a folder from the list:

+ +
    +
  1. Click to highlight the bookmark or folder that you want to remove.
    2. +
  2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or choose Delete from the Edit + menu.
    3. +
+ +

To sort your bookmarks in the Library window:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Changing Individual Bookmarks

+ +

You can change the information for any individual bookmark.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. In your Library window, click a bookmark.
    3. +
  3. Properties for the currently selected bookmark will appear in the bottom + part of the window.
    4. +
  4. Click the arrow next to More to show additional property + fields.
    5. +
+ +

You can rename the bookmark (the name appears in your bookmark list), + add descriptive information, or set a + keyword.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Searching Your Bookmarks

+ +

To search the bookmarks list:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. In your Library window, click the fill-in field in the top right corner + and type all or part of the name or URL (web address) for the bookmarks that + you want to find.
    3. +
  3. Double-click a bookmark in the list to go to that page.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: If the list is hard to read, try expanding the + window.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Exporting or Importing a + Bookmark List

+ +

Your bookmarks can be exported to an HTML file in a folder of your + choosing. You can then edit it and treat it as you would any HTML file.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. In your Library window, open the Tools menu, and choose Export + Bookmarks to HTML.
    3. +
  3. In the Export Bookmarks File dialog box, choose a folder and + filename.
    4. +
  4. Click Save.
    5. +
+ +

Your &brandShortName; bookmarks are not altered by this procedure.

+ +

You can also import bookmarks from other sources. For example, you can + import bookmarks from earlier &brandShortName; versions, other browsers, or + from bookmarks files that your friends send you.

+ +

Before you start, make sure that the bookmarks file you want to import is an + HTML file.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. In your Library window, open the Tools menu and choose Import Bookmarks + from HTML.
    3. +
  3. In the Import Bookmarks File dialog box, navigate to and select the + bookmarks file you want to import, then click Open.
    4. +
+ +

The imported bookmarks are added to the bottom of the Bookmarks Menu + folder.

+ +

Note: Importing a bookmarks file imports the bookmarks and + folders from that file. It does not create two bookmarks files.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Add-ons

+ +

One of the most exciting ways to customize &brandShortName; is through the + addition of Add-ons. In this section, you will learn what Add-ons are, how + to install them, and how to use the Add-ons Manager.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

About Add-ons

+ +

An Add-on is a piece of software that can be added to &brandShortName; to + change its appearance, behavior, or to add new features. It can also change + the language shown in the user interface. Add-ons can be classified in four + types:

+ + + +

Add-ons always come as packages. Each Add-on is a single file with the XPI + extension, except in the case of plugins which usually are binaries specific + to the target operating system.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Installing Add-ons

+ +

There are a number of ways to install Add-ons:

+ + + +

Notes:

+ + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Using the Add-ons Manager

+ +

The Add-ons Manager enables you to install and uninstall Add-ons, enable and + disable them and, in some cases, set preferences for them.

+ +

To access the Add-ons Manager, follow any + of these steps:

+ + + +

The Add-ons Manager opens either in its own dialog window or in a browser + tab. You can modify this behavior in the Tabbed Browsing + preference settings.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Searching for Add-ons

+ +

After accessing the Add-ons + Manager, you can search all available Mozilla Add-ons directly from + the Add-ons Manager and install them as desired:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Using the Add-on Converter

+ +

The Add-on Converter + has been created to convert Firefox and Thunderbird extensions for use in + &brandShortName;. You can try to convert any extension by uploading it from + your computer or by pasting the download URL from + addons.thunderbird.net (AMO) + into the appropriate input line on the Add-on Converter start page. If you + are an expert user, you can make adjustments in the Advanced Options area. +

+ +

Not all Firefox and Thunderbird extensions will work in &brandShortName;. + Most extensions will install successfully, but some may not work properly once + installed. The + compatibility list will help you to anticipate how well a converted + extension will work.

+ +

The easiest way to use the Add-on Converter is to install the + + AMO Browsing for SeaMonkey extension, which will overlay additional + information and links onto the Add-on pages at addons.thunderbird.net. If + the Add-on is not already compatible with &brandShortName;, a link will be + added to the Add-on Converter, which will select appropriate conversion + parameters automatically.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

The Get Add-ons panel

+ +

The Get Add-ons panel in the Add-ons Manager uses web services provided by + the Mozilla Add-ons website to present a list of recommended Add-ons, as + well as giving you the option to browse the available Mozilla Add-ons. After + accessing the Add-ons Manager, + click the Get Add-ons button to show the Get Add-ons panel:

+ + + +

Note: Personalized Add-on recommendations require a list of + your currently installed Add-ons to be sent to the Mozilla Add-ons website. + If you have privacy concerns, this function can be switched off in the + Software + Installation preferences panel.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

The Extensions panel

+ +

The Extensions panel in the Add-ons Manager lists the installed extensions. + After accessing the Add-ons + Manager, click the Extensions button to show the Extensions panel. There, + you can perform the following actions:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

The Appearance panel

+ +

The Appearance panel in the Add-ons Manager lists the installed themes. After + accessing the Add-ons Manager, + click the Appearance button to show the Appearance panel. There, you can + perform the following actions:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

The Plugins panel

+ +

The Plugins panel in the Add-ons Manager lists the plugins found. After + accessing the Add-ons Manager, + click the Plugins button to show the Plugins panel. There, you can perform + the following actions:

+ + + +

Notes:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

The Languages panel

+ +

The Languages panel in the Add-ons Manager lists the installed language + packs. This panel only appears if you have installed a language pack.

+ +

After accessing the Add-ons + Manager, click the Languages button to show the Languages panel. There, + you can perform the following actions:

+ + + +

Note: Enabling a language pack in the Language panel + doesn't change the language shown in &brandShortName;'s user + interface, it only makes the language available for selection in the + Appearance Preferences + panel.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Updating Add-ons

+ +

Updates are by default performed automatically for any Add-ons installed + through the Search or Get Add-ons panels if such updates are offered through + the Mozilla Add-ons website. The global settings can be found in the + Software + Installation preferences panel. You can override those for individual + Add-ons by clicking More and then selecting the desired option. +

+ +

Update functions are also offered in the Add-ons Manager's Tools menu, + found next to the search box:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Specifying How &brandShortName; + Starts Up

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Specifying a Starting Page

+ +

You can specify the page that loads when the browser starts:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under "Display on Browser Startup" choose whether you want a + blank page, your home page, or the last web page visited to open + automatically when you launch your browser. Alternatively you can + tell &brandShortName; to restore the previous session, i.e. the + windows and tabs you had open when you last exited &brandShortName;. +

    Note: If you selected Home Page, type the URL in the + Location Bar.

    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Session Restore

+ +

&brandShortName; periodically saves your browsing session (open windows + and tabs, including form data) to disk. When you start &brandShortName; with + Session Restore enabled, the windows and tabs from your previous session + will be restored. This is especially useful if your previous browsing session + ended unexpectedly (e.g. your computer crashed or a website you visited forced + &brandShortName; to terminate). &brandShortName; will automatically restore + the previous session if "Restore Previous Session" under "Display on Browser + Startup" has been selected. If you chose to not be warned when you close a + browser window with multiple tabs open (see Tabbed + Browsing preference panel), &brandShortName; will open a page from + where you can choose which windows/tabs from the previous session you want to + restore. The same will happen if &brandShortName; crashes repeatedly.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Changing Your Home Page

+ +

Your home page is the page that opens when you click the Home button in the + Bookmarks Toolbar. Depending on how your preferences are set, it may also be + the page that opens automatically when you launch &brandShortName;.

+ +

To specify your home page:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Browser category.
    3. +
  3. In the Home page section, perform one of the following: +
      +
    • Type your home page's URL (web address) in the Location + field.
      • +
    • Click Use Current Page to make the page currently displayed in the + browser window your home page.
      • +
    • Click Choose File to select a file from your computer's hard + drive.
      • +
    +
    4. +
+ +

Tip: To specify your home page quickly, drag the bookmark + icon image of bookmark icon from the Location Bar to the Home Page + button on the Bookmarks Toolbar.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Specifying Which Components + Open at Launch

+ +

You can choose components (such as Mail & Newsgroups and Composer) to + launch when you start &brandShortName;:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Appearance category.
    3. +
  3. Select the components you want opened automatically each time you start + &brandShortName;.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/developer_tools.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/developer_tools.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7263619d3e --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/developer_tools.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +&brandShortName; Tools and Development + + + + +

Web Development Tools

+ +

For web developers, &brandShortName; provides several tools to aid in + developing and debugging web + applications. Some of these are optional installs. To access these + tools, open the Tools menu and choose Web Development.

+ + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..db71e63651 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/glossary.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,912 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Glossary + + + + +
This glossary is provided for your information only, + and is not meant to be relied upon as a complete or authoritative description + of the terms defined below or of the privacy and/or security ramifications of + the technologies described.
+ +

Glossary

+ +
+ +
add-on
A piece of software that can be added to + &brandShortName; to change its appearance, behavior, or to add new features. + It can also change the language shown in the user interface. See also + extension, language + pack, plugin, and theme.
+ +
authentication
The use of a password, + certificate, personal identification number (PIN), or other information to + validate an identity over a computer network. See also + password-based authentication, + certificate-based + authentication, client + authentication, server + authentication, secure + authentication.
+ +
bookmark
A stored web page + address (URL) that you can go to easily by clicking a + bookmark icon in the Bookmarks Toolbar or + choosing the bookmark's name from the Bookmarks menu.
+ +
CA
See certificate + authority (CA)
+ +
CA certificate
A certificate that + identifies a certificate authority. See also + certificate authority (CA), + subordinate CA, root + CA.
+ +
cache
A collection of web page copies stored + on your computer's hard disk or in its random-access memory (RAM). The + browser accumulates these copies as you browse the Web. When you click a link + or type a URL to fetch a particular web page for which the + cache already contains a copy, the browser compares the cached copy to the + original. If there have been no changes, the browser uses the cached copy + rather than refetching the original, saving processing and download + time.
+ +
caret browsing
A &brandShortName; feature that + allows you to navigate through text in Web pages and email messages (or this + Help window) with a caret. Using your keyboard, you can navigate and select + text like you do in a text editor. You can turn caret browsing mode on or off + by pressing the F7 key. Caret browsing mode can also be enabled or + disabled in Advanced Preferences - Keyboard Navigation.
+ +
certificate
The digital equivalent of an ID card. + A certificate specifies the name of an individual, company, or other entity + and certifies that a public key, which is included in the certificate, + belongs to that entity. When you digitally sign a message or other data, the + digital signature for that message is created with the aid of the private key + that corresponds to the public key in your certificate. A certificate is + issued and digitally signed by a certificate + authority (CA). A certificate's validity can be verified by checking + the CA's digital signature. Also called + digital ID, digital passport, public-key certificate, X.509 certificate, and + security certificate. See also public-key + cryptography.
+ +
certificate authority (CA)
A service + that issues a certificate after verifying the identity of the person or + entity the certificate is intended to identify. A CA also renews and revokes + certificates and generates a list of revoked certificates at regular + intervals. CAs can be independent vendors or a person or organization using + certificate-issuing server software (such as &brandShortName; Certificate + Management System). See also certificate, + CRL (certificate revocation list).
+ +
certificate backup password
A + password that protects a certificate that you are backing up or have + previously backed up. Certificate Manager asks you to set this password when + you back up a certificate, and requests it when you attempt to restore a + certificate that has previously been backed up.
+ +
certificate-based + authentication
Verification of identity based on + certificates and public-key cryptography. + See also password-based + authentication.
+ +
certificate chain
A hierarchical series of + certificates signed by successive certificate authorities. A CA certificate + identifies a certificate authority (CA) + and is used to sign certificates issued by that authority. A CA certificate + can in turn be signed by the CA certificate of a parent CA and so on up to a + root CA.
+ +
certificate fingerprint
+ A unique number associated with a certificate. The number is not part of + the certificate itself but is produced by applying a mathematical function to + the contents of the certificate. If the contents of the certificate change, + even by a single character, the function produces a different number. + Certificate fingerprints can therefore be used to verify that certificates + have not been tampered with.
+ +
Certificate + Manager
The part of the browser that allows you to view and manage + certificates. To view the main Certificate Manager window: Open the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu, choose Preferences, click Privacy and Security, and then click Manage + Certificates.
+ +
certificate renewal
The process of + renewing a certificate that is about to + expire.
+ +
certificate verification
When + Certificate Manager verifies a + certificate, it confirms that the digital signature was created by a CA whose + own CA certificate is both on file with Certificate Manager and marked as + trusted for issuing that kind of certificate. It also confirms that the + certificate being verified has not itself been marked as untrusted. Finally, + if the OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) has been + activated, Certificate Manager also performs an online check. It does so by + looking up the certificate in a list of valid certificates maintained at a + URL that is specified either in the certificate itself or + in the browser's Validation preferences. If any of these checks fail, + Certificate Manager marks the certificate as unverified and won't + recognize the identity it certifies.
+ +
cipher
See + cryptographic algorithm.
+ +
client
Software (such as browser software) that sends + requests to and receives information from a server, + which is usually running on a different computer. A computer on which client + software runs is also described as a client.
+ +
client authentication
The process of + identifying a client to a server, + for example with a name and password or with a + client SSL certificate and some + digitally signed data. See also SSL (Secure + Sockets Layer), server + authentication.
+ +
client SSL certificate
A certificate + that a client (such as browser software) presents to a + server to authenticate the identity of the client + (or the identity of the person using the client) using the + SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol. See + also client authentication.
+ +
Component Bar
The toolbar located at the bottom + left of any &brandShortName; window. The Component Bar allows you to switch + between &brandShortName; components by clicking icons for Browser, + Mail & Newsgroups, Composer, and so on.
+ +
A small bit of information stored on your + computer by some websites. When you visit such a + website, the website asks your browser to place one or more cookies on your + hard disk. Later, when you return to the website, your browser sends the + website the cookies that belong to it. Cookies help websites keep track of + information about you, such as the contents of your shopping cart. You can set + your cookie preferences to control how cookies are used and how much + information you are willing to let websites store on them. See also + third-party cookie.
+ +
The part of the browser + that you can use to control cookies.
+ +
CRAM-MD5
A + cryptographic algorithm used for + password encryption to achieve + secure authentication.
+ +
CRL (certificate revocation list)
A list of revoked + certificates that is generated and signed by a + certificate authority (CA). You can + download the latest CRL to your browser or to a server, then check against it + to make sure that certificates are still valid before permitting their use + for authentication.
+ +
cryptographic algorithm
A set of + rules or directions used to perform cryptographic operations such as + encryption and + decryption. Sometimes called a + cipher.
+ +
cryptography
The art and practice of scrambling + (encrypting) and unscrambling (decrypting) information. For example, + cryptographic techniques are used to scramble an unscramble information + flowing between commercial websites and your browser. See also + public-key cryptography.
+ +
decryption
The process of unscrambling data that + has been encrypted. See also encryption.
+ +
digital ID
+ See certificate.
+ +
digital signature
A code created from both + the data to be signed and the private key of the signer. This code is unique + for each new piece of data. Even a single comma added to a message changes + the digital signature for that message. Successful validation of your digital + signature by appropriate software not only provides evidence that you + approved the transaction or message, but also provides evidence that the data + has not changed since you digitally signed it. A digital signature has + nothing to do with a handwritten signature, although it can sometimes be used + for similar legal purposes. See also + nonrepudiation, + tamper detection.
+ +
distinguished name (DN)
A specially + formatted name that uniquely identifies the subject of a + certificate.
+ +
Do Not Track
A mechanism that allows users + to inform websites that they do not want to be + tracked by third-party websites and + web applications. A user' tracking + preferences is included in the HTTP header and sent + to the website. &brandShortName; supports sending Do Not Track + requests, but websites are not obligated to honor those.
+ +
dual key pairs
Two public-private key + pairs—four keys altogether—corresponding to two separate + certificates. The private key of one pair is used for signing operations, and + the public and private keys of the other pair are used for encryption and + decryption operations. Each pair corresponds to a separate + certificate. See also + public-key cryptography.
+ +
eavesdropping
Surreptitious interception of + information sent over a network by an entity for which the information is not + intended.
+ +
encrypted password
Used for + password-based authentication + to achieve secure authentication. + The user's password is encrypted before it is sent to the server + (e.g., by methods like CRAM-MD5) to prevent that + anyone eavesdropping on the connection from seeing it in clear text. This + mechanism is frequently used when no secure + connection method is available.
+ +
encryption
The process of scrambling information in + a way that disguises its meaning. For example, encrypted connections between + computers make it very difficult for third-parties to unscramble, or + decrypt, information flowing over the connection. Encrypted + information can be decrypted only by someone who possesses the appropriate + key. See also public-key + cryptography.
+ +
encryption certificate
A + certificate whose public key is used for + encryption only. Encryption certificates are not used for signing operations. + See also dual key pairs, + signing certificate.
+ +
encryption key
A private key used for + encryption only. An encryption key and its equivalent private key, plus a + signing key and its equivalent public key, + constitute a dual key pairs.
+ +
extension
A type of add-on + that changes the behavior of &brandShortName; or adds new features to + it.
+ +
feed
A frequently updated source of references to web + pages, usually blog articles or news. Technically it is an XML document + available through a public well-known URL, comprising of several items inside, + each one containing some metadata (possibly including a summary) and an URL + to the full blog or news article. The XML document is regenerated at fixed + intervals, or whenever a new article is published to the website. Web + applications can subscribe to the URL serving the feed and present the new + articles as they are updated in the underlying XML document. There are + specific XML formats for feeds, most common of which are + RSS and Atom.
+ +
fingerprint (certificate)
See + certificate fingerprint.
+ +
fingerprinting (browser)
A method of + user tracking by which a user is identified + based on browser characteristics like browser and operating system versions, + stated language preferences, or plugins installed.
+ +
FIPS PUBS 140-1
Federal Information Processing + Standards Publications (FIPS PUBS) 140-1 is a US government standard for + implementations of cryptographic modules—that is, hardware or software + that encrypts and decrypts data or performs other cryptographic operations + (such as creating or verifying digital signatures). Many products sold to the + US government must comply with one or more of the FIPS standards.
+ +
See + third-party cookie.
+ +
frame
Frames are web pages + contained inside of an all-encompassing meta page.
+ +
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A + standard that allows users to transfer files from one computer to another + over a network. You can use your browser to fetch files using FTP.
+ +
geolocation service
A web service for + location aware browsing.
+ +
grippy
A small box element to the left of menubars and + toolbars. The grippy allows the user to quickly collapse menubars and + toolbars. Grippies are not available on macOS. +
+ +
GSSAPI (Generic Security Services Application Program + Interface)
See Kerberos.
+ +
helper application
Any application that is + used to open or view a file downloaded by the browser. A + plugin is a special kind of helper application that + installs itself into the Plugins directory of the main browser installation + directory and can typically be opened within the browser itself (internally). + Microsoft Word, Adobe Photoshop, and other external applications are + considered helper applications but not plugins, since they don't + install themselves into the browser directory, but can be opened from the + download dialog box.
+ +
home page
The page your browser is set to display + every time you launch it or when you click the Home button. Also used to + refer to the main page for a website, from which you can explore the rest of + the website.
+ +
HTML (HyperText Markup Language)
The document format used + for web pages. The HTML standard defines tags, or codes, used to define the + text layout, fonts, style, images, and other elements that make up a web + page.
+ +
HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
The protocol used to + transfer web pages (HyperText documents) between + browsers and servers over the + World Wide Web.
+ +
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure)
The secure + version of the HTTP protocol that uses SSL to ensure the + privacy of customer data (such as credit card information) while en route + over the Internet.
+ +
IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol)
A standard mail + server protocol that allows you to store all your messages and any changes to + them on the server rather than on your computer's hard disk. Using IMAP + rather than POP saves disk space and allows you to access + your entire mailbox, including sent mail, drafts, and custom folders, from + any location. Using an IMAP server over a modem is generally faster than + using a POP mail server, since you initially download message headers only. + Not all ISPs support IMAP.
+ +
Also known as implied or + opt-out consent. Used to describe privacy settings that may allow + websites to gather information about you (for example by means of + cookies and online forms) unless you explicitly choose + to withhold your consent by selecting an option on a page that the website + provides for that purpose. Your consent may not be requested when the + information is actually gathered. See also user + tracking.
+ +
Internet
A worldwide network of millions of computers + that communicate with each other using standard protocols such as + TCP/IP. Originally developed for the US military in + 1969, the Internet grew to include educational and research institutions and, + in the late 1990s, millions of businesses, organizations, and individuals. + Today the Internet is used for email, browsing the + World Wide Web (WWW), instant messaging, + usegroups, and many other purposes.
+ +
IP address (Internet protocol address)
The address + of a computer on a TCP/IP network. Every computer on + the Internet has an IP address. + Clients have either a permanent IP address or one that + is dynamically assigned to them each time they connect with the network. IP + addresses are written as four sets of numbers, like this: 204.171.64.2.
+ +
IRC (Internet Relay Chat)
A protocol used to chat with + other people in real-time using an IRC client.
+ +
ISP (Internet Service Provider)
A company/institution + that provides Internet connections.
+ +
Java
A programming language developed by Sun + Microsystems. A single Java program can run on many different kinds of + computers, thus avoiding the need for programmers to create a separate + version of each program for each kind of computer. Java programs or applets + are not directly supported in your browser.
+ +
JavaScript
A scripting language commonly used to + construct web pages. Programmers use JavaScript to + make web pages more interactive; for example, to display forms and buttons. + JavaScript must not be confused with Java. They are + separate languages. Java is not required for JavaScript to work + correctly.
+ +
key
A large number used by a + cryptographic algorithm to encrypt or + decrypt data. A person's public key, for example, allows other people to + encrypt messages to that person. The encrypted messages must be decrypted + with the corresponding private key. See also + public-key cryptography.
+ +
Kerberos
A mechanism to use single-signon, + smart cards, or other custom methods to + authenticate access without using + passwords for each individual + service. Used mostly in large enterprise/institutional networks where + authentication is provided by centralized services like + LDAP.
+ +
language pack
A type of + add-on that adds a new language to the user interface + of &brandShortName;.
+ +
LaTeX
A word processor and document markup language to + typeset documents, widely used in academia. In particular, it provides a + compact plain text syntax to write complex mathematical formulas.
+ +
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
A standard + protocol for accessing directory services, such as corporate address books, + across multiple platforms. You can set up your browser to access LDAP + directories from the Address Book. You can also set up Mail & Newsgroups + to use an LDAP directory for email address autocompletion.
+ +
location aware browsing
A method to + determine a user's location to provide customized services for the + current position, or for the purpose of user + tracking. In addition to the IP address, + provider-specific information like wireless access points are used to + determine longitude and latitude, altitude as well as speed and heading + (as available) for the requesting website. + Provided by a geolocation service.
+ +
Location Bar
The field (and associated buttons) + near the top of a browser window where you can type a + URL or search terms.
+ +
Malware
Short for Malicious + Software and a general term for a variety of software designed + to disrupt computer operation, gather sensitive information, or gain access + to your computer. They can be distributed by infected web + pages or as attachments to email messages. Examples include viruses, + worms, trojans, spyware, or adware. Malware may redistribute itself by + sending out email messages to infect other computers.
+ +
master key
A symmetric key used by + Certificate Manager to encrypt + information. For example, Password Manager + uses Certificate Manager and your master key to encrypt email passwords, + website passwords, and other stored sensitive information. See also + symmetric encryption.
+ +
master password
A password used by + Certificate Manager to protect the master key and/or private keys stored on a + security device. Certificate Manager needs to + access your private keys, for example, when you sign email messages or use + one of your own certificates to identify yourself to a website. It needs to + access your master key when Password Manager or Form Manager reads or adds to + your personal information. You can set or change your master password from + the Passwords preferences panel. Each security device requires a separate + master password. See also private key, + master key.
+ +
MathML (Mathematical Markup Language)
The markup + language used to write mathematical notations in + web pages.
+ +
The toolbar at the top + of the screennear the top of any &brandShortName; + window that includes the File, Edit, and View menus.
+ +
misrepresentation
Presentation of an entity + as a person or organization that it is not. For example, a website might + pretend to be a furniture store when it is really just a website that takes + credit card payments but never sends any goods. See also + spoofing.
+ +
The toolbar near the top + of the browser window that includes the Back and Forward buttons.
+ +
nonrepudiation
The inability, of the sender of + a message, to deny having sent the message. A regular hand-written signature + provides one form of nonrepudiation. A + digital signature provides another.
+ +
notification bar
A bar that appears at the + top of the content area to inform you about something that needs your + attention, e.g. when the Password Manager can save a password for you, a + popup has been blocked or an additional plugin is required.
+ +
NTLM (NT LAN Manager)
A protocol for + authentication in local networks that is + proprietary to Microsoft Windows. Used mostly in enterprise/institutional + networks.
+ +
object signing
A technology that allows + software developers to sign Java code, JavaScript scripts, or any kind of + file, and that allows users to identify the signers and control access by + signed code to local system resources.
+ +
object-signing certificate
A + certificate whose corresponding private key is used to sign objects such as + code files. See also object signing.
+ +
OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol)
A set of rules + that Certificate Manager follows to + perform an online check of a certificate's validity each time the + certificate is used. This process involves checking the certificate against a + list of valid certificates maintained at a specified website. Your computer + must be online for OCSP to work.
+ +
OPML (Outline Processor Markup Language)
An XML format + used to list feed collections. Although broader in its + specification, it is mainly used nowadays to export and import feed + collections between different feed aggregators or readers, like + &brandShortName;.
+ +
password-based + authentication
Confident identification by means of a name and + password. See also authentication.
+ +
Password Manager
The part of the + browser that can help you remember some or all of your names and passwords by + storing them on your computer's hard disk, and entering them for you + automatically when you visit such websites.
+ +
Bookmarks Toolbar
The customizable toolbar + that appears just below the location bar by default in the browser. It + contains standard buttons such as Home, Bookmarks, and so on that you can add + or remove. You can also add buttons for your favorite bookmarks, or folders + containing groups of bookmarks.
+ +
Phishing
Phishing is a fraudulent business scheme in + which a party creates counterfeit websites, hijacking brand names of banks, + e-retailers and credit card companies, trying to collect victims' + personal information.
+ +
PKCS #11
The public-key cryptography standard that + governs security devices such as smart cards. See also + security device, smart + card.
+ +
PKCS #11 module
A program on your computer + that manages cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption using + the PKCS #11 standard. Also called cryptographic modules, + cryptographic service providers, or security modules, + PKCS #11 modules control either hardware or software devices. A PKCS #11 + module always controls one or more slots, which may be implemented as some + form of physical reader (for example, for reading smart cards) or in + software. Each slot for a PKCS #11 module can in turn contain a + security device (also called token), + which is the hardware or software device that provides cryptographic services + and stores certificates and keys. Certificate + Manager provides two built-in PKCS #11 modules. You may install + additional modules on your computer to control smart card readers or other + hardware devices.
+ +
PKI (public-key infrastructure)
The standards and services + that facilitate the use of public-key cryptography and certificates in a + networked environment.
+ +
plugin
A type of + helper application that adds new + capabilities to your browser, such as the ability to play audio or video + clips. Unlike other kinds of helper applications, a plugin application + installs itself into the Plugins directory within the main browser + installation directory and typically can be opened within the browser itself + (internally). For example, an audio plugin lets you listen to audio files on + a web page or in an email message.
+ +
POP (Post Office Protocol)
A standard mail server protocol + that requires you to download new messages to your local + computer—although you can choose to leave copies on the server. With + POP, you can store all your messages, including sent mail, drafts, and custom + folders, on one computer only. By contrast, + IMAP allows you to permanently store all your messages + and any changes to them on the server, where you can access them from any + computer. Most ISPs currently support POP.
+ +
private browsing
Browsing in a session in + which no private data (like browsing history, cookies, + and cached content) are retained beyond the duration of + the private session. Private browsing should not be confused with anonymous + browsing and does not prevent user tracking or + monitoring of web activity by an internet provider or employer.
+ +
private key
One of a pair of + keys used in public-key cryptography. The private key is + kept secret and is used to decrypt data that has been encrypted with the + corresponding public key.
+ +
proxy
An intermediary or go-between program that + acts as both a server and a + client for the purpose of making requests on behalf of + other clients.
+ +
public key
+ One of a pair of keys used in public-key cryptography. + The public key is distributed freely and published as part of a + certificate. It is typically used to encrypt data + sent to the public key's owner, who then decrypts the data with the + corresponding private key.
+ +
public-key cryptography
A set of + well-established techniques and standards that allow an entity (such as a + person, an organization, or hardware such as a router) to verify its identity + electronically or to sign and encrypt electronic data. Two keys are involved: + a public key and a private + key. The public key is published as part of a + certificate, which associates that key with a + particular identity. The corresponding private key is kept secret. Data + encrypted with the public key can be decrypted only with the private key. +
+ +
root CA
The + certificate authority (CA) with a + self-signed certificate at the top of a + certificate chain. See also + subordinate CA.
+ +
RSS (Really Simple Syndication)
An XML + data format for web feeds.
+ +
safe browsing
Protection against common threats + from Malware and Phishing by + checking each web page against a list of reported + websites. If the web page you are about to visit has been reported as + containing malicious content, &brandShortName; prevents it from loading + and shows a warning instead.
+ +
search engine
A web-based program that allows + users to search for and retrieve specific information from the + World Wide Web (WWW). The search engine may + search the full text of web documents or a list of keywords, or use + librarians who review web documents and index them manually for retrieval. + Typically, the user types a word or phrase, also called a query, into a + search box, and the search engine displays links to relevant web pages.
+ +
secure authentication
A type of + authentication which can be achieved by + encryption of the password or by mechanisms + like Kerberos and NTLM. Not to + be confused with secure connection.
+ +
secure connection
A connection using + SSL or TLS. All communication between + your computer and the server is encrypted so that + no third party eavesdropping on your connection can read it. Note that the + data is only encrypted during transmission between your client application + and the server, after that it is no longer encrypted. To prove its + authenticity to the client, the server needs to identify itself using a + certificate. A bad certificate can indicate + an attack on the server or the connection, thus it is important to heed + certificate warnings.
+ +
security certificate
See + certificate.
+ +
security device
Hardware or software that + provides cryptographic services such as encryption and decryption and can + store certificates and keys. A smart card is one + example of a security device implemented in hardware. + Certificate Manager contains its own + built-in security device, called the + software security device, that is + always available while the browser is running. Each security device is + protected by its own master password.
+ +
security module
See + PKCS #11 module.
+ +
security token
See + security device.
+ +
server
Software (such as software that serves up web + pages) that receives requests from and sends information to a + client, which is usually running on a different + computer. A computer on which server software runs is also described as a + server.
+ +
server authentication
The process of + identifying a server to a client + by using a server SSL certificate. See + also client authentication, + SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
+ +
server SSL certificate
A + certificate that a server presents to a + client to authenticate the server's identity using + the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol.
+ +
signing certificate
A certificate whose + corresponding private key is used to sign + transmitted data, so that the receiver can verify the identity of the sender. + Certificate authorities (CAs) often issue a signing certificate that will be + used to sign email messages at the same time as an + encryption certificate that will be + used to encrypt email messages. See also dual key + pairs, digital signature.
+ +
signing key
A private key used for signing only. + A signing key and its equivalent public key, together with an + encryption key and its equivalent private key, + constitute dual key pairs.
+ +
slot
A piece of hardware, or its equivalent in software, + that is controlled by a PKCS #11 module and + designed to contain a security device.
+ +
smart card
A small device, typically about the size + of a credit card, that contains a microprocessor and is capable of storing + cryptographic information (such as keys and certificates) and performing + cryptographic operations. Smart cards use the PKCS #11 + standard. A smart card is one kind of security + device.
+ +
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that + sends email messages across the Internet.
+ +
SOCKS
A protocol that a proxy + server can use to accept requests from client users in an internal network + so that it can forward them across the Internet.
+ +
software security device
The default + security device used by + Certificate Manager to store private keys + associated with your certificates. In addition to private keys, the software + security device stores the master key used by + Password Manager to encrypt email passwords, + website passwords, and other sensitive information. See also + private key and master + key.
+ +
spoofing
Pretending to be someone else. For example, + a person can pretend to have the email address jdoe@mozilla.com, or + a computer can identify itself as a website called www.mozilla.com + when it is not. Spoofing is one form of + misrepresentation.
+ +
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
A protocol that allows mutual + authentication between a client and a + server for the purpose of establishing an authenticated + and encrypted connection. SSL runs above TCP/IP and + below HTTP, LDAP, + IMAP, NNTP, and other high-level network protocols. + The new Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard called Transport + Layer Security (TLS) is based on SSL. See also + authentication, + encryption.
+ +
STARTTLS
An extension to common standard TCP + protocols (like SMTP, POP or IMAP) so the client can tell the server to + use TLS on the same TCP port as for non-secure + connections.
+ +
Status Bar
The toolbar that appears at the bottom + of any &brandShortName; window. It includes the + Component Bar on the left and status icons on + the right.
+ +
subject
The entity (such as a person, organization, + or router) identified by a certificate. In + particular, the subject field of a certificate contains the certified + entity's subject name and other + characteristics.
+ +
subject name
A + distinguished name (DN) that uniquely + describes the subject of a + certificate.
+ +
subordinate CA
A + certificate authority (CA) whose + certificate is signed by another subordinate CA or by the root CA. See also + certificate chain, root + CA.
+ +
symmetric encryption
An encryption method + that uses a single cryptographic key to both encrypt and decrypt a given + message.
+ +
tamper detection
A mechanism ensuring that + data received in electronic form has not been tampered with; that is, that + the data received corresponds entirely with the original version of the same + data.
+ +
TCP
See TCP/IP.
+ +
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet + Protocol)
A Unix protocol used to connect computers running a variety + of operating systems. TCP/IP is an essential Internet protocol and has become + a global standard.
+ +
theme
A type of add-on that changes + the appearance of &brandShortName;.
+ +
A + cookie from one website that + gets stored on your computer when you visit a different website. Sometimes a + website displays content that is hosted on another website. That content can + be anything from an image to text or an advertisement. The second website + that hosts such elements also has the ability to store a cookie in your + browser, even though you don't visit it directly. Also known as + foreign cookie.
+ +
TLS
Transport Layer Security (TLS) is the new Internet + Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard based on SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). + See also SSL and + encryption.
+ +
token
See security + device.
+ +
tooltip
A small box with text that appears when + you hover your mouse's cursor over certain items. It usually contains + information regarding the item being hovered over.
+ +
trust
Confident reliance on a person or other entity. In + the context of PKI (public-key infrastructure), trust + usually refers to the relationship between the user of a certificate and the + certificate authority (CA) that issued + the certificate. If you use Certificate Manager to specify that you trust a + CA, Certificate Manager trusts valid certificates issued by that CA unless + you specify otherwise in the settings for individual certificates. You use + the Authorities tab in Certificate Manager to specify the kinds of + certificates you do or don't trust specific CAs to issue.
+ +
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)
The standardized address + that tells your browser how to locate a file or other resource on the Web. + For example: http://www.mozilla.org. You can type URLs into the + browser's Location Bar to access + web pages. URLs are also used in the links on web + pages that you can click to go to other web pages. Also known as an Internet + address or Web address.
+ +
user tracking
Methods that some + websites, including advertisers and analytics services, + employ to determine patterns in how you browse the web (e.g., what websites + you have visited, which preferences you have voiced using buttons embedded by + social networks, and your purchase history). This information is mostly used + to show you specifically targeted offers or advertisements for products or + services. Mechanisms for user tracking include cookies + and browser fingerprinting. See also + Do Not Track.
+ +
web application
An application that is not + running on your computer but remotely on a website. + Examples include web-mail systems or web-based systems where you enter + information into a form and receive a response as a web + page. An offline web application can work without a current + connection to the Internet by saving the relevant + pages locally before running the application.
+ +
web page
A single document on the World Wide Web that + is specified by a unique address or URL and that may + contain text, hyperlinks, and graphics.
+ +
website
A group of related web pages linked by + hyperlinks and managed by a single company, organization, or individual. A + website may include text, graphics, audio and video files, and links to + other websites.
+ +
World Wide Web (WWW)
Also known as the Web. A + portion of the Internet that is made up of web pages + stored by web servers and displayed by + clients called web browsers (such as + &brandShortName;).
+ +
WPAD (Web Proxy AutoDiscovery)
A proposed Internet + protocol that allows a Web browser to automatically locate and interface + with proxy services in a network.
+ +
XML (Extensible Markup Language)
An open standard for + describing data. Unlike HTML, XML allows the developer of + a web page to define special tags. For more information, see the online W3C + document + Extensible Markup Language (XML).
+ +
XSLT (Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation)
A + language used to convert an XML document into another XML document or into + some other format.
+ +
XUL (XML User Interface Language)
An XML markup language + for creating user interfaces in applications.
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7d894e9a50 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-glossary.rdf @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-index1.rdf b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-index1.rdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..897b8ebb26 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-index1.rdf @@ -0,0 +1,2247 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-indexAZ.rdf b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-indexAZ.rdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..22cae57917 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-indexAZ.rdf @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-win.rdf b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-win.rdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1c2e5ca181 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help-win.rdf @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/helpFileLayout.css b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/helpFileLayout.css new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9460882988 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/helpFileLayout.css @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +/* This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. */ +@import url("chrome://help/content/platformClasses.css"); + +body { + margin: 2ex; + font-family: sans-serif; + font-size: 0.75em; + max-width: 120ex; +} + +dd { margin-inline-start: 0px; margin-bottom: 1em; } +dt { font-size: 10pt; font-weight: bold; } +tt { font-size: 10pt; } + +:link:hover, +:visited:hover { color: -moz-activehyperlinktext; } + +h1 { font-size: 20pt; } +h2 { border-top: 1px solid black; font-size: 16pt; padding-top: 0.2em; } +h3 { color: #009; font-size: 10pt; margin-bottom: 0px; margin-top: 35px; } + +kbd { font-family: sans-serif; } + +.defaultTable { border-collapse: collapse; border: 1px solid grey; + width: 100%; } + +.defaultTable td { border: 1px solid grey; padding: 4px; } + +.defaultTable th { background-color: #99ccff; + border: 1px solid grey; font-size: 10pt; padding: 4px; text-align: left; } + +.tbody-default > tr:nth-child(2n) { + background-color: #eeeeee; +} + +.boilerPlate { font-size: 7pt; } + +.commandColumn { width: 40%; } +.osFirstColumn { width: 20%; } +.osSecondColumn { width: 20%; } +.osThirdColumn { width: 20%; } + +p:first-child { padding-top: 0; margin-top: 0; } + +.separate > li { margin-bottom: 0.5em; } + +.contentsBox { + margin-top: 12px; + background-color: #cccccc; + border: 1px solid black; + width: 300px; + padding: 1em; +} + +.contentsBox > ul { + list-style-type: none; +} + +a[href^="http://"]:after, a[href^="https://"]:after, a[href^="x-moz-url-link:"]:after { + content: url("images/web-links.png"); +} + +@media print { + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + page-break-after: avoid; + page-break-inside: avoid; + } +} diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..49da2ef034 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/help_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Using the Help Window + + + + +

Using the Help Window

+ +

This section describes how to use the Help window (the entire window in + which this text and the sidebar on the left are displayed).

+ +

For additional sources of support and information, click the links displayed + in the bottom portion of the Help and Support + Center.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Finding the Topic You Want

+ + + +

To see information related to the Help topic you are reading, click + links in the Help window just as you would in a regular web page.

+ +

Retracing Your Steps and Printing

+ +

To retrace your steps in Help, click the buttons near the top left corner of + the Help window:

+ +

+ + + +

Alternatively, print the instructions you want to follow:

+ + + +

Using Help Buttons

+ +

Many specialized &brandShortName; windows and dialog boxes include a help + button.

+ +

Click any help button to see detailed information about the window in + which it appears.

+ +

Search Tips

+ +

If you don't find what you want in your search, here are a few helpful + tips:

+ + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/anchor-in-doc.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/anchor-in-doc.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7b401120e8 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/anchor-in-doc.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/broken.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/broken.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e0c46300df Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/broken.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/bullets.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/bullets.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a8457a591b Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/bullets.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/columns.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/columns.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1b3cb63189 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/columns.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/composer_icon.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/composer_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2e8ac1f415 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/composer_icon.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_nav.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_nav.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b28ccf061f Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_nav.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_print.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_print.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..73b523d02d Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/help_print.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/image.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/image.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d5236e7f45 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/image.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/link.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/link.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4a40004b2c Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/link.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..71eec980ef Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar_search.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar_search.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6d52cd0cb8 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/locationbar_search.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4a2ebaacf1 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag_column.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag_column.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7ecd32e10f Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_flag_column.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_junk_column.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_junk_column.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..34c64a5d8e Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_junk_column.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_alert.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_alert.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5efc813a99 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_alert.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_balloon.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_balloon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bdfc3ccabc Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_balloon.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_trayicon.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_trayicon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6a61fa7202 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_newmail_trayicon.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_quicksearch.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_quicksearch.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b8e2a49873 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_quicksearch.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..48d43202d8 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read_column.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read_column.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..060c82adc9 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_read_column.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_unread.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_unread.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..37baf810ec Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/mail_unread.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/menubar.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/menubar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0c0d0eaae0 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/menubar.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/numbers.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/numbers.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2721565883 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/numbers.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/offline.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/offline.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b32f903850 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/offline.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/online.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/online.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6756ead790 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/online.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/personalbar.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/personalbar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dab7163e2a Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/personalbar.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/reload.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/reload.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f0c23aca63 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/reload.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/search_navigation_toolbar.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/search_navigation_toolbar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0ff37c3a2d Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/search_navigation_toolbar.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/sidebar.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/sidebar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e65f5754ec Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/sidebar.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8949fc96ee Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/tabbed_browsing_bar.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/table.gif b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/table.gif new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d0e0add2a8 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/table.gif differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_mail.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_mail.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0654d8fd3c Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_mail.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_newmail.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_newmail.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b09d6315fa Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/task_newmail.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar-ab.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar-ab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..185b0be800 Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar-ab.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4e19b06ded Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/taskbar.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/threadbutton.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/threadbutton.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..62bdcaa1bf Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/threadbutton.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/web-links.png b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/web-links.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fd7913734c Binary files /dev/null and b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/images/web-links.png differ diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_account_settings.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_account_settings.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c3933d28b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_account_settings.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,1225 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings + + + + + +

Mail & Newsgroups Account + Settings

+ +

This section describes the settings in the Mail & Newsgroups Account + Settings dialog box. Unlike the Preferences dialog box, which applies + settings to all accounts, the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog + box lets you specify settings on a per-account basis.

+ +

If you are not currently viewing the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings + dialog box, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Begin from the Mail window.
    2. +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account + Settings.
    3. +
  3. Select the name of the account whose settings you want to view or + change.
    4. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Account + Settings

+ +

This section describes how to view or change your Account Settings, such as + your user name, reply-to address, and signature. If you are not already + viewing the Account Settings, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the name of the account to display the Account Settings + panel.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Server + Settings

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups can work with two types of mail + servers: IMAP and POP. If you are not sure which server type your Internet + service provider supports, ask your service provider. If your Internet + service provider supports both, the following descriptions may help you + choose which one to use.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

About Internet Message Access + Protocol (IMAP)

+ +

Advantages: Your messages and any changes to them stay on + your server, saving local disk space. Also, you always have access to an + updated mailbox, and you can get your mail from multiple locations. + Performance on a modem is faster, since you initially download message + headers only.

+ +

Disadvantages: Not all ISPs support IMAP.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

About Post Office Protocol (POP)

+ +

Advantages: Your messages are downloaded to your local + computer all at once, but you can also specify whether to keep copies of the + messages on the server and delete messages on the server when they are + deleted locally. Most ISPs currently support POP.

+ +

Disadvantages: If you use more than one computer, messages + might reside on one or the other, but not both. POP doesn't work as well + as IMAP over a slow link connection. Also, you can't access all mail + folders from multiple locations.

+ +

Note that more recent POP servers have features that allow retrieving only + the headers instead of the full message, like IMAP allows. Using these + features allows performance with POP to be nearly as fast as with IMAP.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

IMAP Server Settings

+ +

If you are not already viewing the IMAP server settings, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. (If you + chose an IMAP server when you set up this account, you see your IMAP server + settings.)
    3. +
+ + + +

Advanced IMAP Server Settings

+ +

In most cases, advanced IMAP server settings are automatically supplied by + the server. If you are unsure about the settings for this dialog box, + contact your ISP or system administrator.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the advanced IMAP server settings, begin + from the Mail window.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category.
    3. +
  3. If the mail server type is an IMAP server, you can click Advanced to set + additional IMAP options, such as: +
      +
    • the IMAP server directory path
      • +
    • showing only subscribed folders
      • +
    • support for subfolders
      • +
    • the maximum number of concurrent connections kept open to the server + for this account
      • +
    • any personal and public (shared folder) namespaces for this + directory
      • +
    +
    4. +
+ +

For more information, see + Adding + and Removing LDAP Directories.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

POP Server Settings

+ +

If you are not already viewing the POP server settings, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category name. (If + you chose a POP server when you set up this account, you see your POP + server settings.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

News Server Settings

+ +

This section describes how to change news server settings. If you are not + already viewing news server settings, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the account name and click the Server Settings category. (If you + chose a newsgroup server when you set up this account, you see your + newsgroup server settings.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies + & Folders

+ +

This section describes the settings for sending automatic copies, for + storing copies of outgoing messages, for storing draft messages and message + templates, and where to move archived messages.

+ +

By default, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups stores copies of your + outgoing messages in the Sent folder for the current account. + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups also stores draft messages in the + Drafts folder, message templates in the Templates folder, and moves archived + messages into the Archives folder for the current account.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the settings for Copies & Folders, begin + from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the account, and click Copies & Folders. You see the Copies + & Folders panel.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Composition & + Addressing

+ +

You use Composition settings to choose how to format text, handle replies, + and how a signature you defined is included.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Composition settings, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the account and click the Composition & Addressing + category.
    3. +
+ + + + + +

You use Addressing settings to override the global LDAP server settings + specified for all address books in + the Preferences dialog box. LDAP server settings affect the behavior of + address + autocompletion, and you can change these settings for each account if + necessary.

+ +

Address autocompletion uses your address books to find matching entries when + you type email addresses in the addressing area of the Compose window.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Addressing settings, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the account and click the Composition & Addressing + category.
    3. +
+ + + +

The directory you select will also be searched for matching certificates + when you attempt to send an encrypted message to one or more recipients for + whom you don't have certificates on file.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - + Synchronization & Storage

+ +

Synchronization & Storage settings let you conserve disk space or set + up an account so that you can use it while offline (disconnected from the + Internet). The settings available depend on the mail server type (IMAP, POP, + or News) associated with the account.

+ +
+ +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Synchronization & + Storage Settings (IMAP)

+ +

If you are not already viewing the synchronization and storage preferences + for an IMAP account, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Choose the Synchronization & Storage category for an IMAP + account.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Disk Space Settings (POP)

+ +

Messages from POP accounts are fully downloaded to your local machine unless + you have enabled the Fetch headers only setting. This section + describes how you can save disk space for a POP account. If your account has + the Fetch headers only setting enabled, then these Disk Space + preferences are ignored. If you are not already viewing the Disk Space + preferences for a POP account, follow these steps:

+ +

Begin from the Mail window.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click the Disk Space category for a POP account.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Disk Space Settings (Blogs)

+ +

Messages from blogs & news feeds accounts are only stored in your local + machine in their short form, ie. the article summary, regardless of whether + your settings are to show the full articles by default. Still, there are + options to control how much disk space is used by your blogs & news feeds + account. If you are not already viewing the Disk Space preferences for a + blogs & news feeds account, follow these steps:

+ +

Begin from the Mail window.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click the Disk Space category for a blogs & news feeds account.
    3. +
+ +

There, you can specify which messages should be deleted to recover disk + space:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Synchronization & + Storage Settings (News)

+ +

If you are not already viewing the offline and disk space settings for a + News account, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. + You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Choose the Synchronization & Storage category for a News account.
    3. +
+ + + +

The following settings help to save disk space and download time. Specify + which messages you don't want to download locally:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Common Retention Policy Settings

+ +

&brandShortName; can automatically delete old messages for you. You + can configure this process with the options listed below + To recover disk space, old messages can be permanently + deleted:

+ + + +

With the following settings you can further constrain the three options to + delete messages automatically. This is especially useful in combination with + the option to keep all messages.

+ + + +

This policy can be overridden for an individual folder in the Folder + Properties, Retention Policy tab.

+ +

Note: If message synchronization is enabled (for IMAP), or + messages are left on the server (for POP accounts), the settings apply to + both local copies and their originals on the server.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Junk + Settings

+ +

This section describes how to use the account junk settings. If + you are not currently viewing the Junk Settings, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. + You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click the Junk Settings category for your mail account.
    3. +
+ +

You use the Junk Settings panel to define your account-specific settings + for the adaptive mail filter. Global junk settings are changed under + Mail & + Newsgroups Preferences - Junk & Suspect Mail.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Return + Receipts

+ +

This section describes how to use the Return Receipts account settings. If + you are not currently viewing the Return Receipts settings, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. + You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click the Return Receipts category for your mail account.
    3. +
+ +

You use the Return Receipts settings to define return receipt settings for + outgoing messages from this mail account. You also use the Return Receipt + settings to specify how to manage requests you receive for return receipts. + These settings override global return receipt preferences you specified using + Mail & + Newsgroups Preferences - Return Receipts.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Security

+ +

This section describes how to configure the Mail & Newsgroups Account + Settings that control mail message security. Before you do so, however, you + must obtain one or more mail certificates. For details, see + Signing & Encrypting + Messages.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Security settings for your mail account, + begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account + Settings.
    2. +
  2. Click Security under the name of the mail account whose security settings + you want to configure.
    3. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

About Certificates

+ +

The main purpose of the Security panel in Mail & Newsgroups Account + Settings is to select two certificates:

+ + + +

Depending on the policies of the + certificate authority (CA) + that issues your certificate(s), you can use one certificate for both + purposes or two different certificates. Even if you use just one, you must + specify it twice, once for digital signing and once for encryption.

+ +

The certificates you select here are included with every signed message you + send. These certificates allow your recipients to verify your digital + signature and to encrypt messages that they send to you.

+ +

Digital Signing

+ +

You use the Digital Signing area in the Security + panel to specify how you want to sign your email messages:

+ + + +

Regardless of whether the Digitally sign messages checkbox is + selected here, you can change your mind before you send an individual + message.

+ +

To change the digital signature setting for a message you are writing in + the Compose window, click the arrow below the Security icon near the top of + the window and select or deselect Digital Sign This Message. For + details, see Signing + & Encrypting a New Message.

+ +

Encryption

+ +

You use the Encryption area in the Security panel to + specify how you routinely want to use encryption when sending your + messages:

+ + + +

Regardless of which encryption option you select, you can change your mind + before you send an individual message.

+ +

To change the encryption setting for a message you are writing in the + Compose window, click the arrow below the Security icon near the top of the + window and choose the encryption setting you want. For details, see Signing + & Encrypting a New Message.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Local + Folders

+ +

Local Folders is the account where &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + saves any messages that you send while working offline. Messages you send + while working offline are saved in the Unsent Messages folder under Local + Folders. Any folders you create under the Local Folders account reside on + your hard disk, so Local Folders is a good place to save messages that you + want to keep.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Local Folders settings, begin from the + Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the Local Folders category.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning + of section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing + Server (SMTP)

+ +

The outgoing server will transport your outgoing mail to the intended + recipients.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Outgoing Server (SMTP) settings, begin + from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click on any Mail window.
    2. +
  2. From the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings.
    3. +
  3. Select Outgoing Server (SMTP) and either edit an existing server or + add a new one. If you are not sure which option to choose, check with + your ISP or system administrator)
    + You can choose from these servers via the Outgoing Server dropdown in + the Identity Settings.
    4. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4789322781 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_addressbooks.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,571 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Using Address Books + + + + +

Using Address Books

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

About Address Books

+ +

Address books store email addresses and contact information for people you + typically send mail to, such as colleagues, friends, and family. + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups provides you with two address books: + the Personal Address Book and the Collected Addresses—and you can + create additional address books as well. You can also import address books + from other mail programs and previous versions of &brandShortName;. The + contents of these address books are stored locally on your hard disk.

+ +

Your address book may also list email addresses from an LDAP directory, + which is located on an LDAP directory server. The directory server stores + email addresses of people that are not included in your locally-stored + address books. The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an + industry-standard method for accessing Internet or intranet directory + services such as corporate address books.

+ +

Personal Address Book

+ +

Use the Personal Address Book to add specific names of your choice. You can + create mailing lists and edit individual address entries.

+ +

Collected Addresses

+ +

By default, the Collected Addresses automatically collects the email + addresses contained in outgoing mail messages. Addresses from outgoing + messages are stored in the Collected Addresses as soon as you click Send.

+ +

LDAP Directory (if available)

+ +

An LDAP directory (also known as an address lookup service) stores email + addresses of recipients who are not in your locally-stored address books. + LDAP directories offer you access to large, centrally maintained databases + of email addresses, which is especially useful with + address + autocompletion.

+ +

Automatic address collection is enabled by default. To change automatic + address collection settings, begin in the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the + list.)
    3. +
  3. Under Email Address Collection, select Add email addresses to my + and choose whether you want: +
      +
    • Personal Address Book.
      • +
    • Collected Addresses.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

Opening the Address Book Window

+ +

To open the Address Book window:

+ + + +

Changing the Address Book Window Display

+ +

To customize how the Address Book window and the cards are displayed:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Address Book. You see the Address Book + window.
    2. +
  2. In the Address Book window, open the View menu and choose from the + following display options: +
      +
    • Choose Show/Hide, and then select the item you wish to uncheck (hide) + or check (show).
      • +
    • Choose Show Name As, and then select how you want card names + displayed (first/last, last/first, or Display Name).
      • +
    • Choose Sort by, and then select a sort option.
      • +
    +
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Adding Entries to Your Address + Books

+ +

You can use any of the following ways to add entries to your address + books:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating a New Address Book

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups provides a default personal address + book, but you can create additional address books.

+ +

To create a new address book:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the Address Book icon in the lower-left corner of any + &brandShortName; window, or open the Window menu and choose Address Book. + You see the Address Book window. + + + + + + + + + +
    Address Book icon
    +
    2. +
  2. In the Address Book window, open the File menu, choose New, and choose + Address Book. You see the New Address Book dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Type the name of the new address book, and click OK.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating a New Address Book Card

+ +

Address book cards can be used to store names, postal addresses, email + addresses, phone numbers, and information such as whether the addressee + prefers to receive plain-text or HTML-formatted messages.

+ +

To create an address book card for an individual:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the Address Book icon on the status bar or open the Window menu and + choose Address Book.
    2. +
  2. Click New Card. (If you have multiple address books, select the one to + which you want to add a card.)
    3. +
  3. Each New Card dialog box has three tabs: +
      +
    • Contact: Enter the following information: +
        +
      • First and Last (first and last name of person as you want it to + appear in the address book).
        • +
      • Display name (the name that appears in the To field of the + Compose window).
        • +
      • Nickname (a shortcut or alias for the real name).
        • +
      • Email address (primary and additional address).
        • +
      • Prefers to receive messages formatted as: If you know this + recipient can read HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that + include links, images, or tables), choose HTML. If this recipient + can only read messages sent as plain text (no formatting), then + choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not sure, choose + Unknown. If you choose Unknown, &brandShortName; Mail & + Newsgroups determines the sending format based on the Mail & + Newsgroups Send Format settings in the Preferences dialog box. If + Mail & Newsgroups still can't determine the correct + format, Mail & Newsgroups will prompt you to choose a sending + format when you send the message.
        • +
      • Allow remote images in HTML mail: If you want to allow this + sender to have remote content they send you displayed in your + message window.
        • +
      • Screen name (the AIM contact name).
        • +
      • Phones (enter phone numbers for this person)
        • +
      +
      • +
    • Address: Type additional information such as street + address, phone number, and URL. + +

      Tip: If you enter address information, + &brandShortName; displays a Get Map button next to the address when + you view this entry's address book card in your address book. + Clicking the Get Map button displays a web page that contains a map + to the address.

      +
      • +
    • Other: Store any additional information you + want.
      • +
    +
    4. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly add entries to your address book, click any + email address in messages you receive and select Add to Address Book from the + drop-down list. The New Card dialog box appears where you can complete the + information.

+ +

Viewing or Editing Card + Properties

+ +

To view or edit the properties for an individual card:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the card from the list of entries in the Address Book window.
    2. +
  2. Click Properties.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating a Mailing List

+ +

If you regularly send messages to a group of recipients, you can quickly + address a message by using a mailing list that contains the names you + want.

+ +

To create a mailing list and add it to your address book:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Address Book window, click New List.
    2. +
  2. Enter the following information in the Mailing List dialog box: +
      +
    • Click the drop-down list at Add to to choose an address book + in which to store the list.
      • +
    • List name: When you enter the list name in the To field of a + message, everyone on the list receives your message.
      • +
    • List nickname: Alias (or shortcut) for the list name.
      • +
    • Description: Appears after the list name in the address line of + the Compose window.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Type email addresses to add them to the mailing list.
    4. +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

In the left side of the Address Book window, the mailing list appears + underneath the address book you added it to.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Editing a Mailing List

+ +

Mailing lists are stored in the address book in which you created them.

+ +

To remove a member from the list, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Address Book.
    2. +
  2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by clicking the + small triangle beside the address book title.
    3. +
  3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name. The list members appear + to the right of the mailing list name.
    4. +
  4. Click the entry you wish to delete.
    5. +
  5. Click the Delete button.
    6. +
+ +

To add members to a mailing list:

+ +
    +
  1. Open Window menu and choose Address Book.
    2. +
  2. Expand the address book containing your mailing list by clicking the + small triangle beside the address book title.
    3. +
  3. Highlight the mailing list by clicking its name.
    4. +
  4. Click Properties.
    5. +
  5. Add or remove entries as necessary.
    6. +
  6. Click OK when you are done.
    7. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Searching Address Books and + Directories

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly search an address + book or directory by name or email address, or use a combination of criteria + to perform a more specific search through an address book or directory.

+ +

To quickly search an address book or directory for a name or email address, + begin from the Address Book window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Address Book window, in the list of address books, select the + address book or directory that you want to search.
    2. +
  2. In the Name or Email contains field, type the name or email + address that you want to find. You can type only part of the name or email + address, or you can type the exact text that you want to find. + +

    As soon as you stop typing, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + displays only those entries where the name or email address contains the + search text you entered.

    +
    3. +
  3. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all entries.
    4. +
+ +

Searching for Specific Entries

+ +

You can search address books or directories for specific entries. If you are + not already viewing the Advanced Address Book Search dialog box, begin from + the Address Book window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu and choose Search Addresses. You see the Advanced + Address Book Search dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Next to Search in, choose the address book or directory through + which you want to search.
    3. +
  3. Select the matching option Mail & Newsgroups uses to search for + entries either that match all or at least one of the conditions (criteria) + that you choose.
    4. +
  4. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
    5. +
  5. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. The search + results appear in lower part of the dialog box.
    6. +
  6. To sort the entries in a different order, click the column that you want + to sort by.
    7. +
  7. To view the card for an entry, select the entry and click + Properties.
    8. +
  8. To compose a message to selected recipients, select one or more entries + and click Compose.
    9. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Importing Address Books

+ +

If you have a &brandShortName; address book from another user profile or + computer, or if you have an address book from another mail program, you can + import its entries into the Address Book window as a new address book. Keep + in mind that when you upgrade a user profile from an earlier version of + &brandShortName;, your address books are automatically included, so + there's no need to import them.

+ +

You can import address books from Netscape 6, Netscape 7, Outlook, or text + files (LDIF, tab-delimited (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) + formats). When you import an address book, Mail & Newsgroups creates a + new address book with the imported entries.

+ +

You can also + import + mail messages and settings from Communicator, and Outlook.

+ +

To import an address book, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Mail Import + Wizard.
    2. +
  2. Follow the instructions to import address books.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Exporting Address Books

+ +

You can export a &brandShortName; address book if you later want to import + it into another user profile, move it to another computer, or use it with + another program that can import address books. You can export an address + book to one of these file formats: &brandShortName; (.ldif), tab-delimited + (.tab), comma-separated (.csv), or text (.txt) formats.

+ +

To export an address book, begin from the Address Book window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the address book that you want to export.
    2. +
  2. Open the Tools menu, and choose Export.
    3. +
  3. In the Export Address Book dialog box, browse to the location where you + want to save the address book file.
    4. +
  4. Choose the file format for the exported address book (.ldif, + comma-separated, or tab-delimited).
    5. +
  5. Enter a name for the address book file. Be sure to include the + appropriate file extension (.ldif, .csv, .tab, or .txt).
    6. +
  6. Click Save.
    7. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Adding and Removing LDAP + Directories

+ +

Adding an LDAP directory to your address book allows you to search the + directory for email addresses and other contact information. You can also use + the directory for address autocompletion when addressing mail messages.

+ +

You typically add or remove LDAP directories using instructions provided by + your system administrator. Check with your system administrator for the + information you will need in order to add a new directory to your address + book.

+ +

To add a new directory, begin from the Address Book window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu, and choose New, and then choose LDAP Directory. You + see the Directory Server Properties dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Type the following information in the Directory Server Properties dialog + box General tab: +
      +
    • Name: Enter the name of the directory service (for + example, InfoSpace Directory).
      • +
    • Host Name: Enter the name of the host name server, + such as ldap.infospace.com.
      • +
    • Base DN: This setting is used to set the Base + distinguished name. Enter codes to restrict searching to a specific + country or organization. For example, c=JP restricts the search to + Japan only. Base DN also specifies the organization to search on + within the directory (for instance, o=Netscape Communications + Corporation, c=US).
      • +
    • Port Number: Enter the port number for the LDAP + server. The default is 389.
      • +
    • Bind DN: The distinguished name that is used to + authenticate (log in) to the LDAP server. If left blank, the LDAP + server binds anonymously.
      • +
    • Use secure connection (SSL): Choose this setting + if your LDAP server supports secure (encrypted) connections. If you are + unsure, contact your system administrator.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click the Advanced tab to configure LDAP directory server settings.
    4. +
  4. Type the following information: +
      +
    • Don't return more than _ results: This setting + lets you limit the number of autocompletion matches returned by the + directory server. Enter the maximum number of email address matches + to display for autocompletion.
      • +
    • Scope: Defines the limits of the search. Choose one + of the following: +
        +
      • One Level: Retrieves matching entries by + searching the base DN and one level below the base DN.
        • +
      • Subtree: Retrieves matching entries by searching + the base DN in addition to all levels below the base DN. This is + the least restrictive search.
        • +
      +
      • +
    • Search filter: Enter the search filter to apply to + matching results that are within the specified scope of the + search.
      • +
    +
    5. +
  5. Click OK to close the Directory Server Properties dialog box.
    6. +
+ +

The directory you added appears in the list of address books in the Address + Book window.

+ +

To delete a directory:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the + Preferences dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list.)
    3. +
  3. Under Address Autocompletion on the right side of the dialog box, click + Edit Directories.
    4. +
  4. In the LDAP Directory Servers dialog box, select the directory that you + want to delete and click Delete.
    5. +
  5. Click OK, then click OK again to close the Preferences dialog box.
    6. +
+ +

For information on downloading or synchronizing a directory for offline use + so that you can search it or use it for address book autocompletion while + working offline, see + Downloading + Directory Entries for Offline Use.

+ +

Directory Server Settings

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Directory Server Settings dialog box, + begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu, and choose Address Book.
    2. +
  2. In the list of address books, select a directory.
    3. +
  3. Click Properties.
    4. +
+ +

General Tab

+ + + +

Advanced Tab

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_blogs_and_feeds.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_blogs_and_feeds.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d96199b4e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_blogs_and_feeds.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,388 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Getting started with Blogs & News Feeds + + + + +

Getting + started with Blogs & News Feeds

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Subscribing to blogs & news + feeds

+ +

If you have set up a + Blogs + & News account, you can subscribe to Blogs & News feeds.

+ +

To subscribe to a feed, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Get into the Feed + Subscriptions dialog. There are several ways to do this: +
      +
    • In the accounts pane, click your desired Blogs & News Feeds + account to manage, then click in the Manage Subscriptions in the right + pane.
      • +
    • In the accounts pane, click your desired Blogs & News Feeds + account to manage, or a feed inside it, then open the File menu and + choose Subscribe.
      • +
    • In the accounts pane, right click your desired Blogs + & News Feeds account to manage and choose Subscribe...
      • +
    • Open the Edit menu and select the Mail & Newsgroups Account + Settings option. In the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog, + click on a Blogs & News Feeds account main section, and then + click the Manage Subscriptions... button.
      • +
    +
    2. +
  2. Once in the Feed Subscriptions dialog, click the Add button. The Feed + properties dialog will appear.
    3. +
  3. Type (or copy and paste) the feed URL into the Feed URL field.
    4. +
  4. Click Store articles in dropdown list to choose the item list + where you want the articles to be stored. This allows you to merge + multiple feeds in one list item.
    5. +
  5. Set Show the article summary instead of loading the web page to + display a brief summary that blog feeds usually include for each article. + +

    Tip: Showing the article summary reduces the bandwidth + traffic and is faster, since the summary is already downloaded when the + feed is checked for new items. However, if you usually are interested in + the full article, you will save time by unchecking this option.

    +
    6. +
  6. Click OK to confirm the feed addition.
    7. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Subscribing to blogs + & news feeds from a browser window

+ +

While browsing the web using &brandShortName;, you may find the Feed + discovery icon () while visiting a web page. You + can click on it to see a list of available feeds and choose one to get it + added to your first Blogs & News Feeds account.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Reading blogs & news feeds + messages

+ +

When you open your Blogs & News account, you see the list of feeds to + which you subscribed. &brandShortName; checks and downloads every feed for + new messages.

+ +

To read blogs & news messages, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click a blogs & news account to see its feeds. (If there are + no feeds, you may need to subscribe to one.)
    2. +
  2. Click a feed name to see its messages.
    3. +
  3. Click a message to read it. The header will show the original URL of the + article, which you can click to open a browser window with the + corresponding webpage.
    4. +
+ +

Depending on your settings for the Blogs & News account and each + individual feed, the message will be shown in its summarized view or the + full view. You can change it by choosing the menu option View, and then Feed + Message Body As. You can then select one of these options:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Posting blog messages

+ +

To post a blog message, you need an account in the corresponding blog. Also, + there is no standardized way to post blog messages, so you won't + normally be able to post messages from &brandShortName; Mail component. + Instead, you will need to open a browser window, log in to your blog account + and use the web interface.

+ +

Some blog systems, however, allow posting blog messages by sending an email + message to a specific address. You will need to find out if your blog service + implements this feature, and the correct email address to use.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Adding comments to a blog post

+ +

Since there is no standardized way to add comments to a blog post, you will + usually need to open a browser window and use the web interface.

+ +

Some blog systems, however, allow adding comments by sending an email + message to a specific address. You will need to find out if the blog service + implements this feature, and the correct email address to use.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Exporting and importing feeds

+ +

If you have set up a + Blogs + & News account, you can export or import Blogs & News feed + collections using the OPML format (Outline Processor Markup Language).

+ +

To export the feeds in your selected blogs & news account, begin from + the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the accounts pane, click your desired Blogs & News account to + manage, or a feed inside it.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe (or use any other of the + available methods. + to access to the Feed Subscriptions dialog box).
    3. +
  3. In the Feed Subscriptions dialog, click the Export button. The Export + feeds as an OPML file dialog will appear.
    4. +
  4. Select the directory and filename to save the OPML file, and click + Save.
    5. +
+ +

To import the feeds in your selected blogs & news account, begin from + the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the accounts pane, click your desired Blogs & News account to + manage, or a feed inside it.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe (or use any other of the + available methods. + to access to the Feed Subscriptions dialog box).
    3. +
  3. In the Feed Subscriptions dialog, click the Import button. The Select + OPML file to import dialog will appear.
    4. +
  4. Select the directory and filename to load the OPML file, and click + Save.
    5. +
  5. All the feeds defined in the OPML file will be added to your blogs & + feeds account.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Editing a feed

+ +

If you want to change the properties of one of the feeds in your blogs & + news account, you can edit it.

+ +

To edit a feed in your selected blogs & news account, begin from the + Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the accounts pane, click your desired Blogs & News account to + manage, or a feed inside it.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe (or use any other of the + available methods. + to access to the Feed Subscriptions dialog box).
    3. +
  3. In the Feed Subscriptions dialog, click on a feed in the feed list. You + may need to expand the folders in the feed list to see each individual + feed.
    4. +
  4. Click the Edit button. The Feed properties dialog will appear.
    5. +
  5. You can change where you want the articles to be stored clicking the + Store articles in dropdown list.
    6. +
  6. You may mark Show the article summary instead of loading the web + page to display a brief summary that blog feeds usually include for + each article. + +

    Tip: Showing the article summary reduces the bandwidth + traffic and is faster, since the summary is already downloaded when the + feed is checked for new items. However, if you usually are interested in + the full article, you will save time by unchecking this option.

    +
    7. +
  7. Click OK to confirm the changes.
    8. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Removing a feed

+ +

If you no longer want to follow one of the feeds in your blogs & news + account, you can remove it.

+ +

To remove a feed in your selected blogs & news account, begin from the + Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the accounts pane, click your desired Blogs & News account to + manage, or a feed inside it.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe (or use any other of the + available methods. + to access to the Feed Subscriptions dialog box).
    3. +
  3. In the Feed Subscriptions dialog, click on a feed in the feed list. You + may need to expand the folders in the feed list to see each individual + feed.
    4. +
  4. Click the Remove button. You will be asked to confirm the deletion of the + feed.
    5. +
+ +

Note: don't confuse a feed with a folder in a Blogs + & News account. Removing a feed doesn't delete the folder in which + the feed articles are stored, and thus, such articles will stay in the folder + until you delete either the whole folder or the articles themselves. To get + a better understanding, see Organizing your + feeds later in this section.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Using different blogs + & news feeds accounts

+ +

A single blogs & news feeds account can contain any number of feeds in + it, so you don't strictly need more than one blogs & news feeds + account. However, you may want to create several blogs & news feeds + accounts. Some reasons to do that are:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Organizing your feeds

+ +

The default operation mode when adding a feed to a Blogs & News Feeds + account in &brandShortName; is to create a folder and a feed inside it. + However, &brandShortName; allows you a great deal of flexibility. This section + helps you to better organize your feeds:

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Feeds versus folders

+ +

Blogs & News Feeds accounts are organized through two main concepts: + feeds and folders.

+ + + +

You use the Feed Subscriptions dialog to tell &brandShortName; which feed + messages are downloaded in which folders. As feeds provide new articles and + folders provide the store to put such articles, you will want to have them + connected, usually linking a feed to a folder. However, keep in mind that + removing a feed will not automatically delete the associated folder, nor + will remove the articles/posts from the removed feed, since they are + stored into the folder.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Organizing folders + in Blogs & News Feeds accounts

+ +

You can create, rename, move or copy folders in Blogs & News Feeds + accounts just like with any other account type. See + Creating a folder, + Renaming a folder + and Moving or + copying a folder for more details.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Downloading multiple + feeds in a single folder

+ +

You may want to use a single folder to store articles/items coming from + more than one feed. To do this, you just need to add additional feeds in + that folder. Begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the accounts pane, click your desired Blogs & News Feeds account + to manage, or a feed inside it.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe (or use any other of the + available methods. + to access to the Feed Subscriptions dialog box).
    3. +
  3. In the Feed Subscriptions dialog, click in the desired folder, then click + the Add button. The Feed properties dialog will appear.
    4. +
  4. Type (or copy and paste) the feed URL in the Feed URL field.
    5. +
  5. Click OK to confirm the feed addition.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Moving a feed to another folder

+ +

You can move a feed from a folder to another one using any of these + methods:

+ + + +

Note: Remember that moving the feed doesn't move + existing articles from the folder in which they have been + downloaded.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_getting_started.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_getting_started.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..330ebcabf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_getting_started.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,390 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Using &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + + + + + +
This document is provided for your information only. + It may help you take certain steps to protect the privacy and security of + your personal information on the Internet. This document does not, however, + address all online privacy and security issues, nor does it represent a + recommendation about what constitutes adequate privacy and security + protection on the Internet.
+ +

Using &brandShortName; Mail & + Newsgroups

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups lets you conveniently manage all your + Internet communications from one place. You can set up and maintain multiple + business and personal mail accounts and Internet newsgroups, all from one + window — the Mail & Newsgroups window.

+ +

To start using &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups:

+ + + + + + + + + + + +
Mail & Newsgroups icon
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Getting Started with + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Using the Mail Account Setup + Wizard

+ +

To set up a mail, newsgroup or blogs & news feeds account, first open + the Window menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups. If you haven't + already set up an account, the Account Wizard appears automatically, enabling + you to set up an account.

+ +

The Account Wizard guides you through the process of creating a new account. + If you don't know a setting, click Cancel and ask your Internet service + provider (ISP) or help desk.

+ +

If an account already exists, the Account Wizard doesn't appear + automatically when the Mail window opens. Instead, after opening the Mail + window, open the File menu and choose New, then Account. For more details, + see Setting Up + Additional Mail, News & Blogs & News Feeds Accounts.

+ +

Setting Up Mail + Accounts with an ISP or Email Provider

+ +

Before you set up a mail account, your ISP or email provider should give you + the following information:

+ + + +

Before you set up a newsgroup account, your ISP or email provider should + give you the following information:

+ + + +

To set up a new mail, newsgroup or blogs & news feeds account, begin + from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click Add Account to start the Account Wizard. + +

    The information requested by the Account Wizard depends on the type of + new account you specify in its first window. The boldface headings that + follow correspond to the windows you'll see when you're setting + up an ISP or email provider account.

    +
    3. +
  3. New Account Setup: Choose the type of account you want + to set up, then click the right arrow.
    4. +
  4. Identity: Enter the name and email address appropriate + for this account, then click the right arrow. This window is not available + for the Blogs & News Feeds account type.
    5. +
  5. Server Information: This window is not available for + for the Blogs & News Feeds account type. +
      +
    • Indicate whether you want a POP account or an IMAP account. Not all + service providers can support both options. For more information, see + Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings.
      • +
    • Enter the name of your incoming mail server.
      • +
    • Check the Leave messages on server checkbox if you want to + leave messages on the server so that when you download messages, + &brandShortName; does not remove the messages from the server.
      • +
    • If you want this account to be a part of the Local Folders Global + Inbox account, check the Use Global Inbox box. Mail for + this account will then be stored in your Local Folders. Otherwise, if + the checkbox is unchecked, mail will be stored in its own + directory.
      • +
    • Enter the name of your outgoing mail server (SMTP). + +

      Note: You need to specify only one outgoing mail + server (SMTP), even if you have several mail accounts. The name of + your SMTP host may not have been + explicitly listed in the account setup information provided to you. + For example, your SMTP host may be the same as your POP or IMAP host. + If in doubt, contact your ISP or system administrator.

      +
      • +
    • Click the right arrow to continue.
      • +
    +
    6. +
  6. User Names: Enter the incoming and outgoing user names + provided by your ISP or email provider, then click the right arrow. This + window is not available for the Blogs & News Feeds account type.
    7. +
  7. Account Name: Enter whatever name you want to use to + refer to this account, then click the right arrow.
    8. +
  8. Congratulations! Verify that the information you entered + is correct. If necessary, verify the information you entered with your ISP + or system administrator. When you are sure that it's correct, click + Finish to set up your account.
    9. +
  9. You see your new account listed in the left side of the Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. Click OK to start using your new + account.
    10. +
+ +

You are now ready to get messages from your account. &brandShortName; Mail + & Newsgroups will prompt you for your password when you retrieve mail for + the first time every session. For detailed instructions on how to retrieve + mail, see Getting + New Messages.

+ +

[Return to + beginning of section]

+ +

Setting Up Additional + Mail and News Accounts

+ +

You use the Account Settings dialog box to add a new account or to change + information for an existing account, including:

+ + + +

To add a new account or change settings for an existing account, begin from + the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box. You can perform + these tasks: +
      +
    • Add Account: Click this button to set up a new mail, + news or blogs & news feeds account. Be sure to type the account + information exactly as it is given to you. Move through the screens + with the arrows, or click Cancel to stop account creation.
      • +
    • Set as Default: Select an + account, then click this button to make the selected account the + default one. The default account will appear at the top of your list + of accounts in the Mail window. The change takes effect the next time + you open Mail & Newsgroups. + +

      The default account determines which address is filled into the + From: field when you compose a new mail with either no other mail or + news account active (i.e. Local Folders or a blogs & news feeds + account is selected), through an external application request, or by + following a mailto: link.

      + +

      Note: You can't set a blogs & news feeds + account as default.

      +
      • +
    • Remove Account: Select an account, then click this + button to remove it completely from your Mail window.
      • +
    • Outgoing Server (SMTP): Click this (at the bottom of + the list of accounts) to modify information about the outgoing mail + server. See + Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings - Outgoing Server (SMTP) for more + information.
      • +
    +
    2. +
  2. Click headings under any account's name and modify the corresponding + settings in the panel on the right.
    3. +
  3. Click OK to save your changes.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to + beginning of section]

+ +

Changing the Settings for an + Account

+ +

To view or change information for an existing mail or newsgroup account, + begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click the account name in the left-hand side of the Account Settings + dialog box. You see information about the account, such as your email + address and signature, in the right side of the dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Click any of these items beneath the name of an account to see the + corresponding settings: +
      +
    • Server Settings: The settings available depend on + the type of server (IMAP, POP, or newsgroup server). For more + information, see + Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings - Server Settings. + +

      Important: If you need to change the server type + (for example, from POP to IMAP) you must first remove the existing + account. Next, you must exit &brandShortName; and restart it. You can + then reopen the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box and + recreate an account with the new server type by clicking Add + Account.

      +
      • +
    • Copies & Folders: These settings determine + whether to send automatic messages (blind carbon copies) and where you + want to store copies of outgoing messages, draft messages, and message + templates. For more information, see + Mail + & Newsgroups Account Settings - Copies & Folders.
      • +
    • Composition & Addressing: These settings allow + you to choose your default format and quoting behavior when composing a + message. You can also override the global directory server settings + specified for all address books in the Preferences dialog box. For more + information, see + Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings - Composition & Addressing.
      • +
    • Synchronization & Storage (IMAP and News accounts + only): These settings apply when you are working offline + (disconnected from the Internet) or need to save download time and + conserve disk space. For more information, see + Synchronization + & Storage Settings (IMAP) or + Synchronization + & Storage Settings (News).
      • +
    • Disk Space (POP and blogs & news feeds accounts + only): This setting helps you manage the amount of disk + space that downloaded messages take up on your hard disk. For more + information, see + Disk + Space Settings (POP) or + Disk + Space Settings (Blogs).
      • +
    • Security: These settings determine which + certificates are used to + digitally sign and encrypt mail messages that you send. Digital + signatures allow you to identify yourself reliably to others in + mail messages that you send. Encryption helps ensure that your + messages remain private while they are in transit over the + Internet. For more information, see + Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings - Security.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Click OK to save your changes.
    5. +
+ +

[Return to + beginning of section]

+ +

Importing Mail from Other + Programs

+ +

This section describes how to import mail messages and settings from + Netscape Communicator, and Outlook. To import address books from these + programs, see + Importing + Address Books.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Importing Mail Messages

+ +

To import mail messages from Netscape Communicator, or Outlook, begin from + the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Import Wizard.
    2. +
  2. Follow the instructions to import mail messages.
    3. +
+ +

For Netscape Communicator, the wizard imports a copy of all Communicator + mail folders included under Local Folders. Imported mail is added as a new + folder under Local Folders in the Mail window. (The Communicator mail + folders still remain in their original location).

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Importing Mail Settings

+ +

To import mail settings from Outlook, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu, and choose Import. You see the Import Wizard.
    2. +
  2. Follow the instructions to import mail settings.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_newsgroups.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_newsgroups.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c790958d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_newsgroups.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Getting Started With Newsgroups + + + + +

Getting Started With Newsgroups

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Subscribing to Newsgroups

+ +

If you have set up an account on a + newsgroup server, you can join (subscribe) to newsgroups (also called + discussion groups).

+ +

To subscribe to a newsgroup, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe dialog + box.
    2. +
  2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose another + newsgroup account.
    3. +
  3. Select a newsgroup. To select more than one newsgroup, + CmdCtrl-click additional + newsgroup.
    4. +
  4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the newsgroup. + You see a checkmark next to each newsgroup to which you subscribe. Click + Unsubscribe to cancel a selection.
    5. +
  5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed newsgroups appears in the Mail + window.
    6. +
+ +

If you are an IMAP mail user, you can also subscribe to message folders + located on an IMAP server. (Your Inbox is a type of message folder.) Follow + the instructions above for subscribing, but select an IMAP account from the + Account drop-down list. For more information on sharing folders and + subscribing to folders, see + Sharing + Folders With Other Users (IMAP Only).

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Reading Newsgroup Messages

+ +

When you open your newsgroup server, you see the list of newsgroups to which + you subscribe. The server downloads the headers of new messages in + each newsgroup.

+ +

To read newsgroup messages, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click a newsgroup server icon to see its newsgroups. (If there are + no newsgroups, you may need to subscribe to one.)
    2. +
  2. Click a newsgroup name to see its messages.
    3. +
  3. Click a message to read it. Click the thread button to display all the + responses below the original message. You can click any header to display + its message. You can start a new + thread or post a + message in response.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Posting Newsgroup Messages

+ +

To start new threads (discussions):

+ +
    +
  1. From the list of your subscribed newsgroups in the Mail window, select a + newsgroup.
    2. +
  2. Click Compose.
    3. +
  3. Compose + your message, and click Send to post it.
    4. +
  4. Click Get Msgs to see your posting on the newsgroup.
    5. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Contributing to Ongoing + Discussions

+ +

To post a response to the newsgroup:

+ +
    +
  1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
    2. +
  2. Click Reply.
    3. +
  3. Compose + your message, and click Send to post it.
    4. +
+ +

To reply to an individual as well as post a response to the group:

+ +
    +
  1. In the message list, select a message to reply to.
    2. +
  2. Click Reply All.
    3. +
  3. Compose your message, and click Send to post it.
    4. +
+ +

To redirect a posting to another newsgroup:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Monitoring Threads

+ +

To monitor unread messages in threads that are of interest to you:

+ +
    +
  1. Select a message in a thread.
    2. +
  2. Open the Message menu, and choose Watch Thread.
    3. +
  3. If you want to monitor additional threads, repeat steps 1 and 2 for + messages in additional threads.
    4. +
  4. When you're ready to monitor messages in these threads, open the + View menu, choose Messages, and then choose Watched Threads with Unread. + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups only displays the watched threads + that contain unread messages.
    5. +
  5. Open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose All to return to + viewing all messages in the newsgroup.
    6. +
+ +

To ignore a message thread:

+ +
    +
  1. Select a message in the thread.
    2. +
  2. Open the Message menu, and choose Ignore Thread. &brandShortName; Mail + & Newsgroups marks all messages in the thread as read, and new replies + posted to the thread will appear as read.
    3. +
  3. To view ignored threads, open the View menu, choose Messages, and then + choose Ignored Threads.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Removing a Newsgroup

+ +

To remove a newsgroup from your list:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Adding a Newsgroup Server

+ +

If the newsgroup you want to subscribe to is on a different server, you must + first set up access to that server.

+ +

To set up an additional newsgroup server, open the File menu in the Mail + window and choose New, then Account.

+ + + +

Once you've set up access to the new server, you can + subscribe to newsgroups on that + server. In the Mail window, open the File menu, and choose Subscribe.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_offline.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_offline.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2c958051af --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_offline.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,504 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Working Offline + + + + + +

Working Offline

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups includes advanced features to help + you manage your messaging needs when you are not connected to the Internet. + You can download mail and news messages before going offline for later + reading, and you can defer sending mail messages and newsgroup posts until + you get back online. All of these features are explained in this + document.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Setting Up + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups to Work Offline

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups' offline feature lets you + download your mail and read it offline (while disconnected from the + Internet). If you use a dial-up (modem) connection to access your mail and + you want to reduce the time you are connected, or, if you need to temporarily + disconnect from your company's network while traveling or switching + locations, you can download your mail so that you can read it offline. The + offline feature can automatically download incoming messages and then later + send all your outgoing messages when you reconnect.

+ +

Note that for POP accounts your mail is already downloaded by default, so + most of these offline features aren't relevant for POP accounts.

+ +

If you occasionally want to work offline, &brandShortName; Mail & + Newsgroups lets you easily:

+ + + +

If you frequently work offline, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups also + lets you:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Downloading All Messages for + Offline Use

+ +

You can tell &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups to automatically + download your messages for offline use. Later, when you go back online, + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes your + messages with the server.

+ +

Note that the Inbox for POP accounts is downloaded by default, so this + section does not apply for POP accounts.

+ +

To automatically download your messages for offline use, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. In the left side of the dialog box, under the name of the account you + want to use offline, select Synchronization & Storage. (This category + is not available for POP accounts.)
    3. +
  3. Check the box labeled Keep messages for this account on this + computer.
    4. +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
  5. Click the Online/Offline indicator + in the lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left of the Cookie + icon) to go offline. You will be asked to download messages for them to be + available while offline. Click on Download to proceed.
    6. +
+ +

Note: This setting also applies to any new folders + created. While the per-account setting can be overridden for an + individual + folder, those per-folder settings are removed when the + Keep messages box is toggled.

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all messages + in your Inbox so you can read and respond to them while working offline. + After disconnecting, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups remains open so + you can continue to work with your messages.

+ +

To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

+ + + +

When you go back online, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + automatically synchronizes your Inbox messages with the server, by + replicating any changes you made while working offline.

+ +

Tip: &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups saves any + messages that you send while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder + under Local Folders. To have &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + automatically send your unsent messages when you reconnect, use the + Preferences command on the &brandShortName; + Edit menu to change the + offline + preferences for all your accounts.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Downloading an + Individual Folder for Offline Use

+ +

Note that POP accounts don't allow you to manage folders on the POP + server, so this section does not apply to POP accounts.

+ +

To download a specific folder for offline use, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the left side of the Mail window, select the folder that you want to + download for offline use.
    2. +
  2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Folder Properties. You see the Properties + dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Click the Synchronization tab.
    4. +
  4. Check Select this folder for offline use.
    5. +
  5. Click Download Now if you want to immediately begin downloading the + folder's messages. Alternatively, you can continue working, and when + you are ready to go offline, proceed to the next step.
    6. +
  6. Click the Online/Offline indicator + in the lower right corner of the Mail window to go offline.
    7. +
  7. In the Work Offline dialog box, click Download.
    8. +
+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups automatically downloads all messages + in the selected folder so you can read and respond to them while working + offline. After disconnecting, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups remains + open so you can continue to work with your messages.

+ +

Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading + offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon.

+ +

To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

+ + + +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups automatically synchronizes the + offline folders with the server, by replicating any changes you made while + working offline.

+ +

Tip: &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups saves any + messages that you sent while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder + under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose Send Unsent Messages from the + File menu to send all your saved messages at once. To have &brandShortName; + Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you + reconnect, use the Preferences command on the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu to change your offline + preferences.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Downloading + Selected or Flagged Messages for Offline Use

+ +

Note that messages are downloaded by default for POP accounts. However, if + you have enabled the Fetch headers only setting in the POP account + settings, then only the headers will be downloaded, and you will need to use + the commands in this section to download the complete messages.

+ +

To download selected messages for offline use, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
    2. +
  2. Select the messages you want to download, as follows: +
      +
    • To select a group of adjacent messages, click the first message, and + then Shift-click to select the last message in the group.
      • +
    • To select messages anywhere in the message list, hold down the + CmdCtrl key and click + each message.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Selected Messages + from the submenu. &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups downloads the + selected messages.
    4. +
+ +

To download flagged messages for offline use, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
    2. +
  2. Click in the flag column of each message you want to download. A flag + appears where you clicked to indicate that the message has been marked. If + the flag column is not visible, click the Show/Hide Columns icon + and select Flag from the list.
    3. +
  3. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Get Flagged Messages. + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups downloads the flagged messages.
    4. +
+ +

Once downloading is complete, click the Online/Offline indicator in the + lower right corner of the Mail window (to the left of the Cookie icon) to go + offline. After you disconnect, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups remains + open so you can continue to work with your messages.

+ +

Note that the Get Selected Messages and Get Flagged Messages + menu items are also available in the pop-up thread context menu, for faster + access.

+ +

Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading + offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon.

+ +

To reconnect to the Internet so you can work online:

+ + + +

Tip: &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups saves any + messages that you sent while working offline in the Unsent Messages folder + under Local Folders. When you reconnect, choose Send Unsent Messages from the + File menu to send all your saved messages at once. To have &brandShortName; + Mail & Newsgroups automatically send your unsent messages when you + reconnect, use the Preferences command on the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu to change your offline + preferences.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Downloading + Directory Entries for Offline Use

+ +

You can download (replicate) the entries in a directory server to your + computer so that they are available when you work offline. Once you've + downloaded directory entries, you can use the same procedure to update your + local copy of the entries with the latest entries on the directory + server.

+ +

To download or update an address book LDAP directory for offline use:

+ +
    +
  1. Make sure you're online.
    2. +
  2. Open the Window menu, and choose Address Book.
    3. +
  3. In the Address Book window, select the directory that you want to + download (replicate).
    4. +
  4. Click Properties in the Address Book toolbar. The Directory Server + Properties dialog box appears.
    5. +
  5. Click the Offline tab.
    6. +
  6. Click Download Now to start copying the entries to your computer.
    7. +
  7. If prompted, enter your network user name and password, and click OK to + start the download. + +

    Depending on the number of directory entries, the download process may + take a while, so please be patient.

    +
    8. +
+ +

After the download finishes, you can work offline and search the directory + or use it for address autocompletion when composing messages. After + you've been using your local copy of the directory for a while, you may + wish to update it to get the latest entries from the directory server. To + update your local copy, use the procedure described above.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Setting Up Your Accounts + for Working Offline

+ +

To set up one or more accounts for working offline, you use the Offline and + Disk Space preferences in the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog + box. Once set, you don't need to change these preferences each time you + want to work offline. The offline and disk space preferences you can set for + an account depend on the type of account (IMAP, POP, or Newsgroup).

+ +

Here's a summary of the steps you will follow to set up your accounts + for offline use:

+ +
    +
  1. For each account that you want to work with while offline, use the Mail + & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box to set the Synchronization + & Storage preferences for that account. You must select the items + (folders and newsgroups) that you want to download for offline use. See + Selecting Items for Offline + Viewing for more information. + +

    Once set, you don't need to change these settings. See the sections + below for information on setting offline and disk space preferences for + IMAP, + POP, + Blogs, and + Newsgroup + accounts.

    + +

    Tip: To set the Synchronization & Storage + preferences for the current account, open the File menu, choose Offline, + and then choose Offline Settings.

    +
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync Now + from the submenu.
    3. +
  3. Select the type of messages (mail or newsgroup or both) that you want to + download. + +

    Important: You must select at least one category (mail + messages or newsgroup messages) in order for the download to work.

    +
    4. +
  4. Select Work offline once download and/or sync is complete.
    5. +
  5. Click OK to download the selected items and then go offline. See + Downloading and + Synchronizing Your Messages for more information.
    6. +
+ +

For subsequent offline sessions, you can skip step 1.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Selecting Items for Offline + Viewing

+ +

Before you can read mail and newsgroup messages while offline, you must + first select them for downloading. You can set up an entire account for + offline use. You can also choose which folders and newsgroups that you + want to use offline.

+ +

Note: Keep in mind that selecting more items may increase + download time and disk space used.

+ +

To select accounts, folders, and newsgroups for offline viewing, begin from + the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu, choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Choose the Synchronization & Storage category for the account you + want to change.
    3. +
  3. Click Advanced to see your IMAP folders, or Select newsgroups + for offline use for your subscribed newsgroups. + +

    Note: You see only the newsgroups and folders that + you've already subscribed + to. POP accounts and local mail folders don't appear in the + list.

    +
    4. +
  4. Select the items (folders, newsgroups) that you want to make available + for offline use.
    5. +
  5. Click OK.
    6. +
+ +

Once set, you don't need to change these settings each time you want to + go offline. However, if you do want to change them, you can easily do so + before going offline, since the same Select button is available when using + the Download and + Sync command.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Downloading and + Synchronizing Your Messages

+ +

If you have already selected mail folders and newsgroups for offline use, + you are now ready to download and synchronize them. If you haven't yet + selected items to download, you can choose them before you go offline.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Download/Sync Now dialog box, follow + these steps:

+ +

To download and synchronize your messages, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync + Now.
    2. +
  2. Select the categories (mail messages or newsgroup messages) that you want + to download. + +

    Important: You must select at least one category (Mail + messages, Newsgroup messages) in order for the download to work. If the + checkboxes are disabled, it means that you haven't yet selected + items to download. Use the Select button to select items to download.

    +
    3. +
  3. To send messages in your Unsent Messages folder before going offline, + check Send Unsent Messages.
    4. +
  4. To go offline immediately after &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + finishes downloading, select Work offline once download and/or sync is + complete.
    5. +
  5. To set or change the items to download, click Select. See + Selecting Items for Offline + Viewing for more information. You can skip this step if you've + already selected items for download.
    6. +
  6. Click OK. &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups begins downloading the + selected items.
    7. +
+ +

If you chose to work offline once the download completes, then + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups immediately switches to offline mode. + Otherwise, when you are ready to go offline, click the Online/Offline + indicator in the lower right corner of + the Mail window to go offline.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Working Offline and + Reconnecting Later

+ +

To work offline and reconnect later, begin from the Mail window.

+ +

When you are ready to work offline:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the online/offline indicator + in the lower-right corner of the Mail window. Mail & Newsgroups prompts + you to download messages, if you want, before going offline.
    2. +
  2. Click Download to download messages before going offline. If you want to + work offline without downloading messages, click Don't Download.
    3. +
+ +

Note: Message headers that have been downloaded for reading + offline display a darker gray envelope or newsgroup icon.

+ +

Tip: To set &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups' + download behavior when going offline, open the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu, choose Preferences, and then under the Mail & Newsgroups category, + select Network & Storage (if no subcategories are visible, double-click + Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list). You can choose to have + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups prompt you to download messages when + going offline, to automatically download messages, or to not download any + messages.

+ +

To reconnect and synchronize your messages:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the online/offline indicator in the lower-right corner of any &brandShortName; window.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu, choose Offline, and then choose Download/Sync + Now.
    3. +
+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups synchronizes your messages with the + server by replicating any changes you made while working offline.

+ +

Tip: To set &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups' + behavior when going online, open the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu, choose Preferences, and then choose the Synchronization & Storage + category. You can choose to have &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + prompt you to send unsent messages, to automatically send unsent messages, + or to not send unsent messages.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_organizing.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_organizing.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6a1c08f32d --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_organizing.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,848 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Organizing Your Messages and Controlling Junk + + + + +

Organizing Your Messages

+ +
+ +
+ +

Creating a Folder

+ +

To create a message folder, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu, choose New, and then Folder. You see the New Folder + dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Type the name of the folder.
    3. +
  3. Click the drop-down list and choose a folder location and click OK. Your + new folder appears in your Mail Folders list.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Renaming a Folder

+ +

To rename an existing folder, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the folder you want to rename.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Rename Folder. You see the Rename Folder + dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Type the new name and click OK.
    4. +
+ +

Note: If you rename a folder that you've been using to + store filtered messages, the filter + will automatically update to use the renamed folder.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Moving or Copying a Folder

+ +

You can copy a folder and its contents to another mail account, or move a + folder within the same mail account.

+ +

To move or copy a folder, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the folder you want to move or copy.
    2. +
  2. Do one of the following: +
      +
    • To move the folder under another folder within the same account, drag + the folder over the name of the other folder. The folder you moved + becomes a subfolder of the other folder.
      • +
    • To copy the folder to another account, drag the folder over the name + of another account.
      • +
    • To copy the folder under another folder in another account, drag the + folder over the name of another folder in another account. The folder + you copied becomes a subfolder of the other folder.
      • +
    +
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Filing Messages in Folders

+ +

You can move messages from one folder to another by using either of these + methods:

+ + + +

To copy a message from one folder to another:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the message and right-click to display the pop-up menu.
    2. +
  2. Select Copy To and then select the destination account and folder + from the drop-down list.
    3. +
+ +

Tip: Alternatively, you can copy a message between folders + by holding down the Shift key while dragging the message from the message + list over another folder.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Sharing Folders With Other Users + (IMAP Only)

+ +

Users with IMAP mail accounts can share mail folders with other users on the + same network. Sharing folders allows several users to see and work with the + same messages, similar to a newsgroup. To use shared folders, your IMAP mail + server must support Access Control List (ACL) management. Check with your + system administrator or help desk if you are not sure that shared folders + are supported by your IMAP mail server.

+ +

To share a mail folder with other users on your network, or to view sharing + information for a folder, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Within an IMAP account, select a folder that you want to share, or select + a folder whose sharing privileges you want to view. + +

    Folders listed under Local Folders, or folders listed under a POP mail + account cannot be shared.

    +
    2. +
  2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Folder Properties.
    3. +
  3. Click the Sharing tab.
    4. +
  4. Click Privileges. You may be prompted to enter your network user name and + password. + +

    The Privileges button is only available if the IMAP mail server allows + you to set folder sharing privileges. If this button is not available, + you can view the folder sharing privileges for this folder but cannot + change them.

    +
    5. +
  5. Follow the instructions on the screen to add users and to set their + folder access privileges. +
      +
    • Read privileges: Users can read messages and copy + their contents, but they cannot modify or delete messages, or copy + messages into the folder. Users can flag messages as read or unread. + See Marking or Flagging + Messages for instructions on flagging messages.
      • +
    • Read and Write privileges: In addition to Read + privileges, users can modify and delete messages. Users can also copy + or move messages into the folder.
      • +
    • Manage privileges: In addition to Read and Write + privileges, users can add and remove users and change their folder + permissions.
      • +
    +
    6. +
  6. Click OK to confirm your changes.
    7. +
  7. Click OK to close the Folder Properties dialog box.
    8. +
+ +

In the list of folders for your mail account, a shared folder displays a + distinctive folder icon to indicate that it is shared.

+ +

To send a message that tells others how they can subscribe to your shared + folder, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the shared folder.
    2. +
  2. Right-click to display a pop-up menu, and choose Copy Folder + Location.
    3. +
  3. Click Compose to display a Mail compose window.
    4. +
  4. Click in the message body, open the Edit menu, and choose Paste.
    5. +
  5. Address the message, type a subject, and type the message text. Tell + message recipients that they can subscribe to the shared folder by clicking + the link you pasted into the message. + +

    Only message recipients who share the same network will be able to + subscribe to your shared folder.

    +
    6. +
  6. Click Send.
    7. +
+ +

Subscribing to a Shared Folder

+ +

Subscribing to a shared folder is similar to subscribing to a newsgroup. To + subscribe to a shared folder, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Subscribe. You see the Subscribe dialog + box.
    2. +
  2. If necessary, click the Account drop-down list to choose another IMAP + mail account.
    3. +
  3. Select the folder that you want to subscribe to.
    4. +
  4. Click Subscribe or click in the Subscribe column next to the folder. You + see a checkmark next to each folder to which you subscribe. Click + Unsubscribe to cancel a selection.
    5. +
  5. Click OK. The list of your subscribed folders appears in the Mail + window.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Tagging Messages

+ +

You can apply tags to messages to help you organize and prioritize them. + You can apply a standard color and tag text to messages, or you can create + your own color and tag text to suit your needs.

+ +

One powerful way to use tags is to set up a message filter to + automatically tag incoming messages from a specific sender. For example, + you can set up a message filter so that incoming messages from your boss are + tagged Important and appear in red. See + Creating Message Filters for more + information.

+ +

Applying a Tag

+ +

To apply a tag to a message, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the message you want to tag.
    2. +
  2. Open the Message menu, and choose Tag.
    3. +
  3. Choose the tag you want to apply from the list.
    4. +
+ +

The message summary row changes to the color of the tag with the topmost + priority. To see the tag text, you must display the Tags column in the Mail + window.

+ +

Tip: To quickly tag messages or remove a tag, select + one or more messages and press one of the number keys 1-9 on your keyboard. + Press 0 to remove all tags.

+ +

To display the Tags column, begin from the Mail window:

+ + + +

Note: Message tags apply on a per-account basis. For + example, if you move or copy a tagged message to another mail account, the + tags are not preserved. Similarly, if you forward a tagged message to + another recipient, the tags are not preserved. For IMAP mail accounts, if + your IMAP server supports user-defined keywords, message tags will persist + when you log in to your mail account from a different location.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Customizing Tags

+ +

You can customize tag colors and text and their order to suit your needs.

+ +

To customize tags, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the + Preferences dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Tags. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the + list.)
    3. +
  3. Edit the tag text, or replace it with your own tag text. The tag + can be up to 32 characters long.
    4. +
  4. To change the tag color, click the color block next to that tag and + select a new color.
    5. +
  5. Click the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the tags. Tags at + the top will have higher priority when coloring messages.
    6. +
  6. Click OK.
    7. +
+ +

Your changes are immediately applied to all tagged messages in all your + mail accounts.

+ +

Tip: To undo all customizations and restore just the + default tags' text and colors, follow the steps above to display the tag + settings, and click Restore Defaults.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Sorting Messages by Tags

+ +

To sort messages by tags, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. To display the Tags column if it is hidden, click the Show/Hide Columns + icon and select Tags from the + list.
    2. +
  2. Click the Tags column to sort messages by tags, and within each tag + type, to sort messages by date.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Removing Tags

+ +

To remove a message tag, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select one or more tagged messages.
    2. +
  2. Open the Message menu, and choose Tag.
    3. +
  3. Choose the tag you want to remove or None to remove all tags + from this message.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Marking or Flagging Messages

+ +

You might want to mark a message you've read as unread if you later + want to re-read the message or respond to it.

+ +

To mark a message as unread, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
    2. +
  2. Click in the Read column of each message you want to mark as unread. + Messages marked as unread display a symbol in the Read column. Messages marked as read display a + symbol in the Read column. If the + Read column is not visible, click the Show/Hide Columns icon + and select Read from the list.
    3. +
+ + + + + + + + +
Read column
+ +

You can flag messages that you later want to download for + offline + use.

+ +

To flag messages, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select a Mail or Newsgroup folder to display its messages.
    2. +
  2. Click in the Flag column of each message you want to download. A flag + appears where you clicked to + indicate that the message has been flagged. If the Flag column is not + visible, click the Show/Hide Columns icon and select Flag from the list.
    3. +
+ + + + + + + + +
Flag column
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Using Message Views

+ +

You can apply preset or custom message views to help you manage messages by + filtering displayed messages.

+ +

To use a message view, open the View menu and choose Messages. Choose an + option from the submenu.

+ + + +

Tip: You can quickly change the message view from the View + box in the Search Bar. If you do not see the Search Bar, open the View menu, + choose Show/Hide, and then choose Search Bar.

+ + + + + + + + + +
Quick mail search bar
+ +

Creating a Custom View

+ +

You can create custom message views to only display messages matching + certain criteria.

+ +

To change or create a custom message view:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the View menu, choose Messages, and then choose Customize.
    2. +
  2. To create a new view, click New. To modify a view, select a view and + click Edit.
    3. +
  3. Type a name for the message view.
    4. +
  4. Select the matching option you want Mail to use: all of the + following conditions (criteria) you choose, or any of the + following.
    5. +
  5. Use the drop-down lists to choose the search criteria (for example, + Subject, Sender, contains, doesn't + contain) and then type the text or phrase you want to match. + +

    Tip: To search for messages that contain a header not + listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you want to search + for messages that include the header Resent-From), choose Customize and + type the header you want to search for. &brandShortName; Mail & + Newsgroups adds your custom header to the drop-down list, so you can then + choose it to search for matching entries. Make sure you enter the custom + header correctly, since Mail will only find entries that exactly match + what you type.

    +
    6. +
  6. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
    7. +
  7. Click OK to confirm your settings.
    8. +
  8. Click OK in the Customize Message Views dialog box. The selected view + setting applies automatically.
    9. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating Message Filters

+ +

Message filters allow you to manage and organize your messages. You can + create message filters that &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups uses to + automatically perform certain actions on incoming messages based on criteria + you specify. For example, you can create a message filter that automatically + moves incoming messages to a particular folder. Message filters operate on a + per-account basis.

+ +

If you are not already viewing the Message Filters dialog box, begin from + the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu and choose Message Filters. You see the Message + Filters dialog box.
    2. +
  2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you want to + apply the filter.
    3. +
  3. Click New. You use the Filter Rules dialog box to specify the types of + messages to act on, and the actions you want the filter to perform.
    4. +
  4. Type a name for the filter.
    5. +
  5. Select when you want the filter to be applied. This setting enables you + to define some filters to be applied in an automatic way (when checking + mail), on demand (manually run), or both. After classification means + that junk and phishing controls will be run before applying the + filter.
    6. +
  6. Select the matching option you want Mail to use: all of the + following conditions (criteria) you choose, any of the + following conditions you choose, or all messages.
    7. +
  7. Use the drop-down lists to choose the search criteria (for example, + Subject, Sender, contains, doesn't + contain) and then type the text or phrase you want to match. + +

    Tip: To search for messages that contain a header not + listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you want to search + for messages that include the header Resent-From), choose Customize and + type the header you want to search for. &brandShortName; Mail & + Newsgroups adds your custom header to the drop-down list, so you can then + choose it to search for matching entries. Make sure you enter the custom + header correctly, since Mail will only find entries that exactly match + what you type.

    +
    8. +
  8. Click + to add criteria and - to remove them.
    9. +
  9. Use the list to choose the action you want the filter to perform on the + messages (for example, Move Message To). Use + and - to add + or remove additional actions. + +

    Tip: To automatically tag incoming messages, choose + Tag Message from the drop-down list.

    + +

    Tip: Message filters are applied one after another. It + could be that you don't want all filters to be run if one or more + messages match some conditions. For instance, you may want to tag all + messages from your boss's email address as Important, and + you may want all messages containing the word Memorandum in their + subject to be moved to a folder named Pending Reads, but you + don't want any message from your boss to be moved to another folder, + even if it contains Memorandum in the subject. So the first + message filter you define should match your boss's email address, + and would contain two actions: Tag Message as Important and + Stop Filter Execution.

    +
    10. +
  10. If you have chosen Move or Copy message to a folder, then + select a destination folder in which to store the messages, or create a + new folder.
    11. +
  11. Click OK to confirm your settings.
    12. +
  12. To run filters on existing messages in a folder, select the folder + in the bottom dropdown list and click the Run Now button.
    13. +
  13. Click OK in the Message Filters dialog box. The filter begins filtering + incoming messages as soon as you click OK.
    14. +
+ +

Note: You can also run message filters manually at any + time. In the Mail window, choose Tools, and then select Run Filters on Folder + to apply filters to the current folder, or Run Filters on Message to apply + filters to the selected message (if any).

+ +

To manage your filters, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu and choose Message Filters. You see the Message + Filters dialog box.
    2. +
  2. If you have multiple mail accounts, choose the one to which you want to + apply the filter.
    3. +
  3. Choose from the following: +
      +
    • To turn a filter on or off: Click the checkbox to + the right of the filter name to enable it, or click it again to turn it + off.
      • +
    • To edit a filter: Select the filter name and click + Edit (or double-click the filter name). Use the Filter Rules dialog box + to make your changes.
      • +
    • To delete a filter: Select the filter name and click + Delete.
      • +
    • To change the order in which filters are applied: In + the filter list, click a filter's name, and click Move Up + or Move Down to move it. + +

      Note: Filters are applied to each incoming message + in the order you choose, until a filter action results in the message + being deleted or moved from the Inbox folder.

      +
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Click OK when you are done managing your filters. If you created a new + filter, it begins filtering incoming messages as soon as you click OK.
    5. +
+ +

Note: If you delete a folder that you've been using to + store filtered messages, the filter will no longer work. Incoming messages + that match the filter criteria will appear in your Inbox. If you rename or + move the folder, the filter will automatically update to use the renamed or + moved folder.

+ +

Tip: If you have existing messages that you want to move to + another folder, use the Run Filters on Messages option in the Tools menu.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Filtering Messages From a + Specific Sender

+ +

You can quickly create a filter for messages from a particular sender. For + example, if you want to automatically move all incoming messages from your + child's teacher into a folder called School, you can quickly set + up a filter to do this.

+ +

To create a filter for messages from a specific sender, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select a message from a specific sender.
    2. +
  2. Open the Message menu and choose Create Filter From Message. Or, in the + message header pane, right click the sender name and choose Create Filter + From.
    3. +
  3. You see the Filter Rules dialog box. Using the sender's email + address, &brandShortName; prefills the filter matching criteria and the + filter action (Move Message to). You can change or add new rules to the + matching criteria.
    4. +
  4. Choose a destination folder in which to store the incoming messages from + the specified sender, or create a new folder. You can also choose other + actions for this filter, or change the default one.
    5. +
  5. Note that, if you leave the filter name empty, &brandShortName; will + provide a name for it based on the first criterion.
    6. +
  6. Click OK to confirm your settings. You see the + Message Filters dialog box, where + you can create, delete, or edit message filters.
    7. +
  7. Click OK. The filter begins filtering incoming messages from the + specified sender as soon as you click OK.
    8. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Searching Through Messages

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups lets you quickly find text in a + single message, search messages by subject or sender, or use a combination of + criteria to perform a thorough search through all messages in a specific mail + folder, newsgroup, or account.

+ +

To locate text in a single message, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the message, open the Edit menu, and choose Find in This + Message.
    2. +
  2. Type the text that you want to locate in the dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Click Find to locate the first occurrence of the text.
    4. +
  4. Continue clicking Find to locate additional occurrences, or click Cancel + when you are done.
    5. +
  5. Choose Find Again from the Edit menu to continue searching for the text + throughout the rest of the message.
    6. +
+ +

To quickly search for messages in a selected folder by subject or sender, + begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. To the right of Subject or Sender contains:, type the subject text + or sender name that you want to find. You can type only part of the subject + or sender, or you can type the exact word or name that you want to find. + +

    As soon as you stop typing, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + displays only those messages in the selected folder where the subject or + sender contains the search text you entered.

    +
    2. +
  2. Click Clear to erase the search text and show all messages in the + selected folder.
    3. +
+ +

Searching for Specific Messages

+ +

You can search mail folders or newsgroups for specific messages. If you are + not already viewing the Search Messages dialog box, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Tools menu and choose Search Messages. You see the Search + Messages dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Next to Search for messages in, choose the account, newsgroup, or + folder through which you want to search.
    3. +
  3. Select Search subfolders to include all subfolders in the + search.
    4. +
  4. Next to Perform search operations on, select an option where to + search for messages in newsgroups or IMAP accounts: +
      +
    • Choose Local system to use only the information stored locally + for the search without any network activity. This mode includes all + major message headers. You can't search the message body locally + unless the account and its folders have been set up for + synchronization. +
      • +
    • Choose Remote server to perform all searches on the server + where the messages are located. This will allow you to also search for + contents in message bodies which have not been synchronized.
      • +
    +

    Note: This menu will be disabled if it's not + possible to search remotely on the server (e.g., for POP accounts).

    +
    5. +
  5. Select which matching option Mail & Newsgroups will use to search for + messages that match all or at least one of the conditions (criteria) that + you choose.
    6. +
  6. Use the drop-down lists to indicate the search criteria (for example, + Subject and contains) and then type the text or phrase that + you want to match. + +

    Tip: To search for messages that contain a header not + listed in the first drop-down menu (for example, if you want to search + for messages that include the header Resent-From), choose Customize and + type the header you want to search for. &brandShortName; Mail & + Newsgroups adds your custom header to the drop-down list, so you can then + choose it to search for matching entries. Make sure you enter the custom + header correctly, since Mail will only find entries that exactly match + what you type.

    +
    7. +
  7. Click More to add criteria and Fewer to remove them.
    8. +
  8. Click Search to begin, or click Clear to reset your entries. The search + results appear in lower part of the Search Messages dialog box. +
      +
    • To open a message so you can read it, select the message and click + Open, or double-click the message.
      • +
    • To sort the messages in a different order, click the column that you + want to sort by.
      • +
    • To move or copy a message in the Results area to another folder, + select the message and then choose the destination folder from the File + drop-down list. If the destination folder is within the same account, + the message is moved to that folder. If the destination folder is + within a different account, the message is copied to that folder.
      • +
    • To delete a message in the Results area, select the message and then + click Delete.
      • +
    • To open the folder where the message is stored, select the message + and click Open Message Folder.
      • +
    +
    9. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Controlling Junk Mail

+ +

This section describes how to use &brandShortName;'s Junk Mail Controls +to filter unwanted mail, and how phishing detection works.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ + +

Using Junk Mail Controls

+ +

&brandShortName;'s Junk Mail Controls feature can evaluate your + incoming messages and identify possible junk (or unsolicited) messages. The + feature uses the Bayesian classification method. You first train + &brandShortName; by showing it a bunch of mail that is junk, and a bunch of + mail that is not. Then, you let it auto-classify new mail for you. If + &brandShortName; makes any mistakes, you can correct them.

+ +

To use Junk Mail Controls:

+ +
    +
  1. First, train &brandShortName; to recognize Junk messages and Non-Junk + messages. There are three ways to toggle junk status of the selected + message(s): +
      +
    • Open the Message menu, select Mark and choose As Junk + or As Not Junk.
      • +
    • Click on the Junk toolbar button.
      • +
    • + +

      Click to toggle the Junk Status column in the message list. (If you + do not see it, click the right-most button ( + ) in the list header bar and + select Junk Status from the pop-up menu.)

      +
      • +
    + +

    When you toggle junk status, a trash-can icon will appear or disappear + in the Junk status column to indicate the junk status of the selected + message.

    +
    2. + +
  2. Open the Edit menu, and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. + You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Click the Junk Settings category for your mail account.
    4. +
  4. Enable the feature and &brandShortName; will automatically classify + incoming messages. (See + Junk Mail Controls Options. + Details on the other settings there can be found in the + Junk Settings + preference panel description.) +
    5. +
  5. If you have trained it on virus mail, consider disabling the white + listing (many mail viruses send bulk messages to people in the address book + of the infected computer).
    6. +
  6. Make sure to correct the Junk Mail Controls when it incorrectly labels + messages either as junk or not junk.
    7. +
  7. To analyze existing messages, select messages, open the Tools menu + and choose Run Junk Mail Controls.
    8. +
+ +

Note: &brandShortName; will only run Junk Mail Controls + when the training database has information on non-Junk messages. If Junk Mail + Controls do not work, select some messages and explicitly mark them as Not + Junk.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Junk Mail Controls Options

+ +

To fine-tune how Junk Mail Controls work, use the + Junk & + Suspect Mail preference panel for account-independent settings and the + account manager's Junk + Settings for settings of a specific mail account.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Junk Mail Controls and Filters

+ +

Junk Mail Controls run after mail filters (unless you set the filter to run + after classification, where classification includes junk and phishing + scanning) and apply only to the Inbox folder and its sub-folders. Use this to + your advantage, for example, you can filter mail you are sure not to be Junk + to a special folder outside of Inbox so that the messages will not be + classified as Junk (especially useful if you subscribe to newsletters or if + you are on a moderated mailing list).

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Phishing Detection

+ +

Phishing is a particularly common fraudulent business scheme in which + a party creates counterfeit websites designed to trick recipients into + divulging personal data such as credit card numbers, account usernames, + passwords and social security numbers. Hijacking brand names of banks, + e-retailers and credit card companies, phishers often convince + recipients to respond.

+ +

In many cases, you'll receive a link to a phishing page via an email + which claims to come from an official-looking address. You can also end up + at these pages by following links that you find on the Web or in IM + messages.

+ +

Tip: Since a forged URL + can look very similar to a genuine one, it's safer to use a bookmark + you've created or to type the URL into the location bar by hand instead + of following a link in an email message. Always consider the risk of a forged + URL if you're asked to log in or provide private information on a + website.

+ +

&brandShortName; Mail phishing detector is enabled by default. When it + encounters a mail which seems to be scam, it will show a warning bar in the + message window.

+ +

If you think that the email is a valid one, you can click on the Not + Scam button, and the warning bar will disappear.

+ +

When a user clicks on a link in an email that appears to be a phishing URL, + &brandShortName; will prompt the user with a dialog box before the website + is opened.

+ +

This prompt will appear if either of the following is true: the host name of + the actual URL is an IP address, or + the link text is a URL whose host name does not match the host name of the + actual URL.

+ +

Note: Phishing detection has a higher precedence than Junk + Mail detection.

+ +

For more technical details on this subject, see the online document + Know your Enemy: + Phishing.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_preferences.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_preferences.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..27e1d5f54e --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_preferences.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,792 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Mail & Newsgroups Preferences + + + + + +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences

+ +

The sections listed below describe the Mail & Newsgroups preferences + that apply to all your mail and newsgroup accounts. To see these + preferences:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the list.
    3. +
+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Mail & + Newsgroups

+ +

This section describes the main Mail & Newsgroups preferences. If you + are not already viewing the Mail & Newsgroups main preferences, follow + these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the + Preferences dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Click the Mail & Newsgroups category.
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Message + Display

+ +

Message Display preferences allow you to choose how messages are displayed + in all accounts. If you are not already viewing the Message Display settings, + follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the + Preferences dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message Display. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Notifications

+ +

Notification preferences allow you to select different methods for informing + you on arrival of a new message. So you don't have to always look in the + folders.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Notifications. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Composition

+ +

Composition preferences affect how you create messages (for example, + forwarding options and address autocompletion) in all accounts. If you are + not already viewing the Composition settings, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Composition. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Send Format

+ +

Send Format preferences allow you to specify how you want to format your + outgoing messages. If you are not already viewing the Send Format settings, + follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the + Preferences dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Send Format. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ +

Formatted messages (composed in HTML) can be sent as HTML, plain text, or + both (those composed in plain text will always be sent as plain text only). +

+ +

If any of the recipients isn't explicitly listed to receive HTML, + based on his or her address-book entry or on a domain-based setting as + explained below, the following options apply:

+ + +

Settings for entire domains:

+ + +

Settings depending on the message content:

+ + +

For example, if you typically send mail to multiple recipients that have the + same domain name (for example, your colleagues all have email addresses that + end in netscape.net), and you know that this domain name is capable of + displaying HTML messages, then you can add the netscape.net domain to the + list of HTML Domains so that Mail & Newsgroups will automatically send + messages in HTML format to these recipients (note that no plain-text part is + sent in this case).

+ +

Similarly, if you typically send mail to recipients at a domain that you + know can only receive Plain Text messages, you can add that domain name to + the list of Plain Text domains, so that Mail & Newsgroups automatically + sends messages to that domain in plain-text format (no HTML part is sent).

+ +

Whenever you add a person or address card to your address book, you can + specify whether that addressee can receive HTML-formatted messages. However, + when this information is unknown, you can set Send Format preferences for how + Mail & Newsgroups formats these messages.

+ +

You can always override these preferences for an individual message by + using the Options menu in the Mail Compose window.

+ +

Note: If you regularly compose HTML (formatted) mail + messages, keep in mind that sometimes not all recipients use mail programs + that can display HTML formatting properly. Send Format preferences allow you + to specify how you want to format messages that go to recipients who cannot + display HTML-formatted mail. You can convert messages to plain text, format + them only as HTML, or format them as both HTML and plain text. These + preferences apply to all your mail accounts, but only to mail messages and + not to newsgroup messages.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - + Addressing

+ +

Addressing preferences allow you to control the settings for + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups address books (for example, email + address collection and address autocompletion). If you are not already + viewing the Addressing settings, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the + Preferences dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Addressing. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - + Junk & Suspect Mail

+ +

This section describes how to use the Junk & Suspect Mail preferences + panel. If you are not currently viewing the Junk & Suspect Mail panel, + follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Junk & Suspect Mail. + (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to + expand the list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Tags

+ +

This section describes how to use the Tags preferences panel. You use the + Tags preferences to define the tag text, colors and order for message tags. + If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Tags. (If no options + are visible, double-click the Mail & Newsgroups category to expand the + list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Return + Receipts

+ +

This section describes how to use the Return Receipts preferences panel. If + you are not currently viewing the Return Receipts panel, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Return Receipts. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the + list.)
    3. +
+ +

You use the Return Receipts preferences to define return receipt settings + for outgoing messages from all your mail accounts. You also use the Return + Receipt preferences to specify how to manage requests you receive for return + receipts.

+ + + +

To override these global preferences for individual accounts, see + Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings - Return Receipts.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - Text Encoding

+ +

Text (character) encoding preferences allow you to choose how messages are + encoded when being displayed or created in all accounts. If you are not + already viewing the Text Encoding settings, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences. You see the + Preferences dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Text Encoding. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Mail & Newsgroups Preferences - + Network & Storage

+ +

This section describes how to use the Network & Storage preferences + panel. If you are not currently viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, select Network & Storage. + (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to + expand the list.)
    3. +
+ +

The Network & Storage preferences allow you to set preferences for + working offline, going online, mail connections and disk space.

+ + + +

See Working Offline for + information on working offline.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_security.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_security.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..86781bbb24 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_security.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,463 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Signing & Encrypting Messages + + + + +

Signing & Encrypting Messages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

About Digital Signatures & + Encryption

+ +

When you compose a mail message, you can choose to attach your digital + signature to it. A digital + signature allows recipients of the message to verify that the message + really comes from you and hasn't been tampered with since you sent + it.

+ +

When you compose a mail message, you can also choose to encrypt it. + Encryption makes it very difficult + for anyone other than the intended recipient to read the message while it is + in transit over the Internet.

+ +

Signing and encryption are not available for newsgroup messages.

+ +

Before you can sign or encrypt a message, you must take these preliminary + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Obtain one or more certificates + (the digital equivalents of ID cards). For details, see + Getting Your + Own Certificate.
    2. +
  2. Configure the security settings for your email account. For details, see + Configuring Your + Security Settings. +
    3. +
+ +

Once you have completed these steps, you can complete the instructions in + Signing & Encrypting a + New Message.

+ +

The sections that follow provide a brief overview of how digital signatures + and encryption work. For more technical details on this subject, see the + online document + Introduction + to Public-Key Cryptography.

+ +

How Digital Signatures Work

+ +

A digital signature is a special code, unique to each message, created by + means of public-key + cryptography.

+ +

A digital signature is completely different from a handwritten signature, + although it can sometimes be used for similar legal purposes, such as signing + a contract.

+ +

To create a digital signature for an email message that you are sending, you + need two things:

+ + + +

How Encryption Works

+ +

To encrypt an email message, you must have an + encryption certificate + for each of the message's recipients. The public key in each certificate + is used to encrypt the message for that recipient.

+ +

If you don't have a certificate for even a single recipient, the + message cannot be encrypted.

+ +

The recipient's software uses the recipient's private key, which + remains on that person's computer, to decrypt the message.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Getting Other People's + Certificates

+ +

Every time you send a digitally signed message, your encryption certificate + is automatically included with the message. Therefore, one of the easiest + ways to obtain someone else's certificate is for that person to send you + a digitally signed message.

+ +

When you receive such a message, the person's certificate is + automatically stored by the Certificate + Manager, which is the part of the browser that keeps track of + certificates. This is useful because you need to have a certificate for each + recipient of any email message that you want to send in encrypted form.

+ +

Another way to obtain certificates is to look them up in a public directory, + such as the phonebook directories maintained by many companies.

+ +

It's also possible to look up certificates automatically. This feature + is controlled by + Mail & + Newsgroups Preferences - Addressing or + Mail & Newsgroups + Account Settings - Addressing, which can be configured to look up + recipients' email addresses in a directory.

+ +

When you are using any account that is configured to look up addresses in a + directory, the same directory will be searched for matching certificates when + you attempt to send an encrypted message to one or more recipients for whom + you don't have certificates on file.

+ +

The directory will also be searched for missing certificates when you open + the drop-down menu below the Security icon in the Compose window and choose + View Security Info.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Configuring Security Settings

+ +

Once you have obtained an email certificate (or certificates), you must + specify the certificates you want to use for signing and encrypting + messages.

+ +

For information about obtaining email certificates, see + Getting Your + Own Certificate.

+ +

To specify which signing and encryption certificates to use with a + particular account, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings.
    2. +
  2. Click Security under the name of the mail account whose security settings + you want to configure.
    3. +
  3. Under Digital Signing, click Select. (You may be asked to provide your + Master Password before you can + proceed further.) + +

    A dialog box appears that allows you to select from among your available + signing certificates.

    +
    4. +
  4. Choose the signing certificate you want to use, then click OK.
    5. +
  5. Follow the same steps under Encryption: click the Select button, select + the encryption certificate you want to use, and click OK.
    6. + +

    In some cases you may be able to specify the same certificate under + Encryption that you specified under Digital Signing; check with your system + administrator to find out for sure.

    +
+ +

Optionally, you can also indicate that you normally want to sign or encrypt + all messages sent from a particular account. These account-specific settings + are for convenience only; you can override the default settings for + individual messages.

+ +

To configure your default signing and encryption settings, start from the + Security panel for the account (described above) and select your settings as + follows:

+ + + +

When you have finished configuring your mail security settings, click OK to + confirm them.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Signing & Encrypting a New + Message

+ +

Before you can digitally sign or encrypt any message, you must obtain at + least one email certificate and configure your mail security settings + correctly. For background information on these tasks, see + About Digital Signatures + & Encryption.

+ +

The settings specified in + Mail & Newsgroups + Account Settings - Security determine the default settings for each new + Compose window you open when you set out to write an email.

+ +

To open a Compose window, start from the Mail window and click Compose. You + can immediately identify the default security settings from the presence or + absence of these icons near the lower-right corner of the window:

+ + + + + + + + +
digital signature iconThe message will be digitally + signed (assuming you have a valid email certificate that + identifies you).
encryption iconThe message will be encrypted + (assuming you have valid certificates for all recipients).
+ +

To turn these settings off or on, click the arrow just below the Security + icon in the Mail toolbar near the top of the window. Then select the item you + want from the drop-down list:

+ + + +

To view detailed information about the message's security status, you + can also click the key or lock icon as described in + Message Security - Compose + Window.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Reading Signed & Encrypted + Messages

+ +

When you view a signed or encrypted message in the Mail window, these icons + near the upper-right corner of the message header indicate the security + status of the message:

+ + + + + + + + + + + +
digital signature iconThe message is digitally + signed and has been validated. If there is a problem with the signature, + the pen is broken.
unknown iconThe message is signed, but it has a + large attachment that has not yet been downloaded from the IMAP server. + As a result, the signature cannot be validated. Click the icon to + download the attachment and validate the signature.
encryption iconThe message is encrypted. If there + is a problem with the encryption, the key is broken.
+ +

For information about certificate validation, see + Controlling + Validation.

+ +

To see more detailed information about the message's security, click + the key or lock icon, or follow the instructions in + Message Security - Received + Message.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Message Security - Compose Window

+ +

This section describes the Message Security window that you can open for any + message you are composing. If you're not already viewing Message + Security, click the Security icon in the toolbar of the Compose window.

+ +

The Message Security window describes how your message will be sent:

+ + + +

When you compose a message and select a different account, the signing + and encryption preferences are updated to reflect the settings of + the newly selected account.

+ +

The Message Security window also lists the certificates available for the + recipients of your message:

+ + + +

For more information about obtaining certificates and configuring message + security settings, see Signing + & Encrypting Messages.

+ +

To indicate your signing or encryption choices for an individual message, + click the arrow beside the Security button in the Compose window, then select + the options you want.

+ +

To indicate your default signing and encryption preferences for all + messages, see Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings - Security

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Message Security - Received + Message

+ +

This section describes the Message Security window that you can open for any + message you have received. If you're not already viewing Message + Security for a received message, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Mail window, select the message for which you want to view + security information.
    2. +
  2. Open the View menu and choose Message Security Info.
    3. +
+ +

The Message Security window displays the following information:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_using_mail.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_using_mail.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8685b747d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/mailnews_using_mail.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,1188 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Using &brandShortName; Mail + + + + +

Reading Messages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Getting New Messages

+ +

For an IMAP account, you can retrieve new messages automatically and display + them in the Inbox by opening Mail & Newsgroups and selecting the Inbox + for the IMAP account.

+ +

For a POP account, you must select the Inbox and click Get Msgs to retrieve + your messages. By default, messages from your POP account are downloaded in + full and deleted from the POP server when you retrieve them. You can + change your POP + server settings to retrieve just the headers and/or store a copy of + messages on the server in addition to downloading them to your computer.

+ +

For news accounts, expanding the account newsgroups list will automatically + check for new items, as it will by just selecting one of the newsgroups. + While reading a newsgroup, you can force checking for new items by clicking + Get Msgs.

+ +

For blogs & feeds accounts, the first time you expand the account, it + will be checked for new items. Besides that, you can force checking for new + items at any time by clicking Get Msgs.

+ +

You can also set up Mail & Newsgroups to get new messages at startup and + to check for new messages at timed intervals.

+ + + + + + + + + +
Mail & Newsgroups icon
+ +

The Mail & Newsgroups icon on the status bar displays a green arrow to + notify you when new messages have arrived.

+ + + + + + + + + +
New mail notification
+ +

To set up a mail account to automatically check for new messages, begin from + the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. If you have multiple accounts, select an account and click the Server + Settings category for that account.
    3. +
  3. Select one or both of the following options in the Server Settings + section: +
      +
    • Check for new mail at startup: Select this checkbox + if you want to check this account automatically for new messages + whenever you start Mail & Newsgroups. For POP accounts, Mail & + Newsgroups checks for new mail, but doesn't download new messages + until you click Get Msgs or unless you choose Automatically download + any new messages.
      • +
    • Check for new messages every [__] minutes: Select + this checkbox if you want to specify the number of minutes between mail + checks. You can also check for new messages at any time by clicking Get + Msgs in the Mail window.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Click OK. Your settings take effect the next time you start + &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups.
    5. +
+ +

To set up &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups to play a sound or display + an alert when new mail arrives, see Mail & Newsgroups + Preferences - Notifications.

+ +

You can always retrieve messages manually at any time. To get new messages + for the selected account or newsgroup, do one of the following:

+ + + +

To get new messages for all your mail accounts, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button in the Mail toolbar.
    2. +
  2. Choose Get All New Messages. &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups + retrieves new messages for all your mail accounts. + +

    If you are not currently logged into one of your mail accounts, Mail + & Newsgroups first prompts you to enter your user name and password + before retrieving new messages for that account. (If you have already + stored your user name and password using the Password Manager, Mail & + Newsgroups doesn't prompt you for this information.)

    +
    3. +
+ +

Note: You can also open the File menu (in the Mail window) + and choose Get New Messages for.

+ +

To get new messages for a specific mail account, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the triangle on the Get Msgs button on the Mail toolbar.
    2. +
  2. Choose the account for which you want to retrieve mail.
    3. +
+ +

Note: Mail & Newsgroups prompts you for your password + the first time you retrieve messages for an account. You can choose to have + Mail & Newsgroups store your password in the Password Manager at that + time.

+ +

Password Manager can save all your user names and passwords on your own + computer and enter them for you automatically. For more information, see + Using the Password + Manager.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Choosing How You View the Mail + Window

+ +

You can customize the layout of the Mail window (the window you see when you + choose Mail & Newsgroups from the Window menu):

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Sorting and Threading Messages

+ +

To sort messages by categories such as subject, sender, date, or priority, + begin from the Mail window:

+ + + +

To reorder column headings, begin from the Mail window:

+ + + +

To change which columns are displayed, begin from the Mail window:

+ + + +

To group messages by threading (subject), so each message is grouped with + all its responses:

+ + + + + + + + + + + +
Thread button
+ +

Tip: The thread button automatically sorts the threads by + the age of their parent messages. If you want to use another sort criterion + for the threads, open the View menu and select the desired option from the + Sort by submenu.

+ +

Tip: Select Preserve threading when sorting messages + in the Mail & + Newsgroups Preferences if you want &brandShortName; to preserve the + threaded message grouping when sorting messages with column header clicks. The + thread button just toggles between threaded and unthreaded message grouping in + this mode. If Preserve threading when sorting messages is not selected, + &brandShortName; automatically displays the messages unthreaded when you sort + them by clicking on a column header.

+ +

Tip: To help you identify unread messages in a collapsed + thread where you've read the parent message, &brandShortName; Mail & + Newsgroups underlines the parent message.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Saving and Printing Messages

+ +

To save a mail message as a plain-text, HTML, or Outlook file:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Mail window, select the message.
    2. +
  2. Open the File menu and choose Save As, and then choose File.
    3. +
  3. For Save as type, choose a file type (HTML, Text, or Mail file). + Choose Mail file if you want to save the message so it can be opened by + Microsoft Outlook.
    4. +
  4. Change the filename's extension to end in .html, .txt, or .eml, + depending on the file type you chose in step 3.
    5. +
  5. Choose a destination for the file and click Save.
    6. +
+ +

To print a selected message:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Controlling Images, Scripts, + and Plugins

+ +

By default, images and other content, that is hosted remotely, will not + display in messages you receive, except from senders in your address books + whom you have allowed. To change these settings:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Message Display. (If + no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to + expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. Uncheck Block images and other content from remote sources.
    4. +
  4. Click OK to have your change take effect.
    5. +
+ +

Note: See Allow remote images in HTML mail in Creating + a New Address Book Card for details of how to change which senders can + show remote content.

+ +

By default, plugins are not enabled for mail messages you receive. To change + this setting:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Scripts & Plugins. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Advanced to expand the + list.) +
      +
    • Under Enable Plugins for, check Mail & Newsgroups + to enable plugins.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click OK to have your changes take effect.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Sending Messages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Composing Mail and Newsgroup + Messages

+ +

You can address, compose, reply to, or send a new message by doing one of + the following:

+ + + +

Tip: Use the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings - + Composition & + Addressing dialog box to specify the HTML text editor to use for + composing messages sent from this account. (You can specify a different + editor for each of your accounts.) See + Changing + the Settings for an Account for more information.

+ +

Note: It is generally not possible to compose messages for + them to be published in blogs & news feeds accounts. If you want to + publish posts in a blog (and you have the appropiate rights to do it), you + will need to use the mechanisms provided by the specific blog system. In some + cases, this can even include sending a mail message to a specific address.

+ +

Composing messages in HTML format allows you to use different fonts, text + styles (such as bold or italic) and text colors, tables, numbered or bulleted + lists, and pictures in your messages. However, some recipients may only be + able to read messages composed in plain text format. If you want to use the + plain-text editor occasionally, you can hold down the Shift key while + clicking the Compose or the Reply button to use the plain-text editor on an + as-needed basis.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Using the Message Composition + Window

+ +

Use the Compose window to address, compose, and send mail and newsgroup + messages. First specify whether you want to compose messages in plain text or + HTML by default in the Composition & + Addressing Preferences panel (open the Edit menu and choose Mail & + Newsgroups Account Settings).

+ +

To view the Compose window, click the Compose button on the Mail + toolbar.

+ +

The Compose window contains the following:

+ + + +

If you've chosen to compose messages using the HTML editor, you see an + additional toolbar with text formatting buttons similar to those in + &brandShortName; Composer.

+ +

For help using the HTML editor, see + Formatting Your Web + Pages.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Addressing a Message

+ +

To address a mail message:

+ +
    +
  1. Type the name in the addressing area. + +

    If you have address + autocompletion enabled (it's enabled by default), type the first + few letters of the recipient's name and wait for Mail & + Newsgroups to complete the address. (Or you can type part of the name and + immediately press ReturnEnter to have Mail & Newsgroups try to complete + the address.)

    +
    2. +
  2. If multiple addresses are displayed, select an address and press + ReturnEnter. + +

    Note: Use a comma to separate multiple addresses on the + same line. Do not use a comma to separate first or last names. For + example, multiple entries might be:

    + +

    user1@netscape.net,user2@netscape.net

    +
    3. +
  3. If you want this message to be sent from a different account, click the + From field to select the account you want. See + Changing the + Account From Which a Message is Sent for more information.
    4. +
  4. If necessary, click To to choose a different recipient type: +
      +
    • To: For primary recipients of your message.
      • +
    • Cc: For secondary recipients (carbon copy).
      • +
    • Bcc: For secondary recipients not identified to the + other recipients, including those in the cc list (blind carbon + copy).
      • +
    • Reply-To: For recipients to reply to a different + email address other than the one the message is sent from.
      • +
    • Newsgroup: For posting to a newsgroup.
      • +
    • Followup-To: For redirecting a newsgroup posting, so + that subsequent replies go directly to the redirected newsgroup instead + of the original newsgroup.
      • +
    +
    5. +
+ +

Tip: You can quickly address a message by clicking the + email address contained in a message you're reading, and then selecting + Compose Mail To from the pop-up menu.

+ +

Changing the + Account From Which a Message is Sent

+ +

If you have multiple mail accounts, the account listed in the From field is + based on the account (or server) you selected when you choose to create a new + message. However, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups also allows you to + change the account a message is sent from while you're composing a + message. Click the From field to view a list of your accounts and then select + the account you want. A copy of the message is saved in the Sent folder of + the account where you sent the message from.

+ +

About Address Autocompletion

+ +

Address autocompletion allows you to address mail easily from the Compose + window without having to search for names or type complete names. Mail & + Newsgroups automatically checks your address books and an + LDAP directory server (if available) and + completes the name if it finds a unique match. It also prevents mistakes by + showing all possible choices with additional information if it finds multiple + matches. Address autocompletion is enabled by default.

+ +

If you don't want to use an address that Mail & Newsgroups + provides, press Backspace or Delete to remove characters and then enter an + alternate address.

+ +

To disable address autocompletion:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click Addressing. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand + the list).
    3. +
  3. In the Address Autocompletion section, deselect Local Address + Books and Directory Server.
    4. +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Selecting Message Sending + Options

+ +

While you're composing a message, you can select these additional + message sending options from the Options menu:

+ + + +

Additionally, the following options are available from the Edit menu:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Replying to a Message

+ +

To reply to a mail message:

+ + + +

To include the original message each time you reply to any message, and to + specify how to place the original message in the reply:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. + You see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. If you have multiple accounts, select an account and click the + Composition & + Addressing category for that account.
    3. +
  3. Select Automatically quote the original message when + replying.
    4. +
  4. Specify where in the message to place your reply. Start my reply below + the quote is the default.
    5. +
  5. If you have decided to attach a + signature to every outgoing message and selected to start your reply + above the quote here, you can additionally configure where your signature + is placed: +
      +
    • Select below the quote (recommended) to place your signature + at the very end of the message below the quoted text.
      • +
    • Select below my reply (above the quote) to place your + signature between your reply and the quoted text.
      • +
    + +

    Note: If you have created a signature, you can + optionally omit + it when replying to a message.

    +
    6. +
  6. Click OK.
    7. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Forwarding a Message

+ +

When you forward a message, you can specify how its contents are included + in the new message: inline (in the body of the message), or as an + attachment.

+ +

To forward a message:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the message and click Forward.
    2. +
  2. Type the name or email address of the recipient.
    3. +
  3. Click Send.
    4. +
+ +

To set the default for forwarding messages:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click + Composition. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the + list.)
    3. +
  3. For forwarding messages, choose Inline (in the message body) or As + Attachment. + +

    Note: If you have created a signature and forward + inline, its placement depends on the respective reply setting. You can + optionally omit the + signature when forwarding a message.

    +
    4. +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: To override the default for forwarding a message, + select the message, open the Message menu, and choose Forward As, then + choose Inline or Attachment.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Confirming That Your Message + Was Opened

+ +

You can use return receipts to notify you when a recipient has displayed + (opened) your message. The recipient must be using a mail program that + supports the Message Disposition Notification (MDN) standard. Keep in mind + that the recipient may choose not to send you a return receipt, even if + you've requested one. Messages you send to a newsgroup address will not + include a return receipt request, since news servers don't support this + feature.

+ +

To request return receipts for all messages you send, you can use the global + Return + Receipt preferences to specify how to manage requests you receive for + return receipts. You can override these global preferences for individual + accounts.

+ +

To request a return receipt on a per-message basis:

+ + + +

To automatically request return receipts when sending messages from each of + your mail accounts:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click + Return + Receipts. (If no subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & + Newsgroups to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. Select When sending messages, always request a return receipt.
    4. +
  4. Click OK.
    5. +
+ +

For more information on setting return receipt preferences, see + Mail & + Newsgroups Preferences - Return Receipts.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Saving and Editing a Draft + Message

+ +

To save a mail message as a draft so you can complete it later:

+ + + +

To edit or send a draft message, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the Drafts folder for the account where you created the draft + message.
    2. +
  2. Click the message that you want to edit.
    3. +
  3. In the top-right corner of the message, click the Edit Draft + button.
    4. +
  4. Edit the message as necessary.
    5. +
  5. Click Send to send the message or click Save to save the message so you + can complete it later. + +

    Note: Sending the message removes it from the Drafts + folder.

    +
    6. +
+ +

Tip: You can also double-click the message to open it for + editing. This is especially useful if the message pane is closed.

+ +

To delete one or more unwanted draft messages, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the Drafts folder for the account where you created the draft + messages.
    2. +
  2. Select the draft messages that you want to delete.
    3. +
  3. Click Delete in the Mail toolbar.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating and Using Templates

+ +

Templates are useful for setting the default format for messages that you + send regularly, such as weekly status reports. You can save a message as a + template from any window in which it is displayed, including from within a + Mail compose window.

+ +

To save a message to use as a template:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Mail window, click Compose to create a new message and then set + the default font, text size, text color, background color, and any other + default formatting you want. + +

    Alternatively, open an existing message that already has the formatting + you want.

    +
    2. +
  2. While displaying the message, open the File menu, choose Save As, then + choose Template. The message is stored as a template in the Templates + folder for the current mail account.
    3. +
+ +

To compose a message using a template:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Mail window, select the Templates folder for the account where you + created the message template.
    2. +
  2. Double-click the message template to open it.
    3. +
  3. Edit the message, then save it (to put it in the Drafts folder) or send + it. + +

    Note: Sending the message does not remove the template + from the Templates folder. The template is preserved for future use.

    +
    4. +
+ +

To delete one or more unwanted message templates, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the Templates folder for the account where you created the message + templates.
    2. +
  2. Select the message templates that you want to delete.
    3. +
  3. Click Delete in the Mail toolbar.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Creating HTML Mail Messages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Using HTML in Your Messages

+ +

HTML messages can include formatted text, links, images, and + tables—just like a web page. However, some recipients may not be able + to receive HTML messages. &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups allows you + to compose mail and newsgroup messages using either the HTML (rich-text) + formatting editor or the plain-text editor for each mail account you have. + In addition, you can choose whether your addressees should receive HTML or + plain-text messages by default, and how Mail & Newsgroups should handle + messages when it's not known if an addressee can receive HTML-formatted + mail.

+ +

To specify whether to use the HTML editor as the default for composing + messages, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Select the mail or newsgroup account you want to use.
    3. +
  3. Go to the Composition & Addressing panel and select Compose + messages in HTML format. You see the Formatting toolbar in the Compose + window. Leave this box unchecked to use the plain-text editor for this + account.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Editing or Inserting HTML + Elements

+ +

If you understand how to work with HTML source code, you can edit or insert + additional HTML tags, style attributes, and JavaScript in your mail message. + If you are not sure how to work with HTML source code, it's best not to + change it. To work with HTML code, use one of these methods:

+ + + +

For more information on editing HTML source code, see + Using the + Advanced Property Editor.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Choosing HTML Mail Sending + Options

+ +

By default, Mail & Newsgroups prompts you before sending HTML messages + when it's not known whether the recipient's mail program can + display HTML-formatted messages.

+ +

To choose sending-format options for mail messages, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Mail & Newsgroups category, click + Send Format. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Mail & Newsgroups to expand the + list). + +

    Note: This preference applies only to mail messages, + not to newsgroup messages.

    +
    3. +
  3. Select the option you want and then click OK.
    4. +
+ +

If while composing a message you realize that one or more recipients may not + be able to receive HTML-formatted mail, you can easily convert the message to + a different format when you click Send:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Compose window, open the Options menu and choose Format.
    2. +
  2. Select the format you want to use for sending the message from the + submenu: +
      +
    • Auto Detect: Mail & Newsgroups chooses the + appropriate format for the message text. If it can't determine the + format, it asks you to choose a format.
      • +
    • Plain Text Only: The message may not display + formatting such as bold text, but all mail programs will be able to + display the message.
      • +
    • Rich Text (HTML) Only: Some mail programs may have + trouble displaying an HTML-formatted message. Choose this option only + if you are sure the recipient's mail program can display + HTML-formatted mail.
      • +
    • Plain and Rich (HTML) Text: This uses more disk + space, but may be the best choice if you are not sure whether the + recipient's mail program can display HTML-formatted mail.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. When you've finished composing the message, click Send.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Specifying Recipients for HTML + Messages

+ +

You can save time by indicating whether individuals in your address books + prefer to receive either HTML messages or plain text messages.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Window menu and choose Address Book.
    2. +
  2. Select the address book on the left and then select the individual's + card on the right.
    3. +
  3. Click Properties to display the Card for dialog box.
    4. +
  4. In the Contact tab, use the Prefers to receive messages formatted + as drop-down list to select HTML if you know this recipient can read + HTML-formatted messages (such as messages that include links, images, or + tables). + +

    If this recipient can only read messages sent as plain text (no + formatting), then choose Plain Text. If you don't know or are not + sure, choose Unknown.

    + +

    If you choose Unknown, &brandShortName; Mail & Newsgroups determines + the sending format based on the Send Format settings for Mail & + Newsgroups in the Preferences dialog box. If Mail & Newsgroups still + can't determine the correct format, it will prompt you to choose a + sending format when you send the message.

    +
    5. +
  5. Click OK.
    6. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Viewing the Message + Source for HTML Messages

+ +

You can quickly view the HTML and other code that generates an HTML message + you've received:

+ +
    +
  1. In the message list window, open the message.
    2. +
  2. Open the View menu and choose Message Source.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Using the HTML Mail Question + Dialog Box

+ +

The HTML Mail Question dialog box appears when you try to send a message to + someone whose mail program may not be able to display HTML messages or when + Mail & Newsgroups cannot determine whether your recipient can display + HTML messages. If you are in doubt, send the message in both HTML and + plain-text formats.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Using Attachments

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Attaching a File or Web Page

+ +

To attach a file to an outgoing mail message:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Compose window, click Attach or open the File menu and choose + Attach File. You see the Enter file to attach dialog box. + +

    Tip: You can also click inside the Attachments area to + attach a file.

    +
    2. +
  2. Type the name of the file you want to attach, or select a file from your + hard drive that you want to attach.
    3. +
  3. Click Open. The filename appears in the Attachments area.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: You can also drag and drop one or more files from your + desktop into the Attachments area in the Compose window.

+ +

To attach a web page to an outgoing mail message:

+ +
    +
  1. In the Compose window, open the File menu and choose Attach Web Page.
    2. +
  2. In the dialog box, enter the URL of the page and then click OK. The web + page URL appears in the Attachments area.
    3. +
+ +

Tip: When you are viewing a page in the browser, + you can send the page to someone by opening the File menu and choosing Send + Page.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Viewing and Opening Attachments

+ +

If you receive a mail attachment that consists of a file type that + &brandShortName; can display (such as graphic files and HTML files), you see + the attachment displayed inline (in the body of the message). For other file + types, Mail & Newsgroups lets you open the attachment using another + application, or you can save the attachment on your hard disk.

+ +

To open the attachment, make sure you have a program on your computer that + can open files of the same type as the attachment's file format. For + example, if you want to open a .DOC file, make sure you have a program on + your computer that can open .DOC files.

+ +

To open an attachment:

+ +
    +
  1. Double-click the attachment you want (if there is more than one).
    2. +
  2. In the Downloading dialog box, choose what you want &brandShortName; to + do with the attachment: +
      +
    • If &brandShortName; finds an application on your hard disk that can + open the attachment, you can open the attachment using that + application. Click Choose to use a different application to open + the attachment.
      • +
    • If &brandShortName; can't find an application on your hard disk + that can open the attachment, you can save the attachment. You + won't be able to open the attachment, but at least you can save + it on your hard disk until you can install an application that can open + it.
      • +
    • Click Advanced to add a new file type to the list of helper + applications. &brandShortName; uses helper applications to determine + how different file types are opened by other applications from within + &brandShortName;. For more information, see + Plugins and + Downloads.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. Click OK.
    4. +
+ +

Note: If you are viewing your mail using an IMAP mail + server, all attachments remain on the server.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Saving Attachments

+ +

To save an attachment:

+ +
    +
  1. In the right side of the message envelope, under Attachments, + select the attachment that you want to save.
    2. +
  2. Right-click or, if you have a one-button mouse, + Ctrl-clickthe attachment and choose Save As from the + pop-up menu.
    3. +
  3. Choose a filename and location for the attachment on your hard disk and + then click OK. Mail & Newsgroups downloads the attachment and saves it + to the specified location.
    4. +
+ +

Tip: To save all attachments, right-click + or, if you have a one-button mouse, + Ctrl-clickthe first one in the attachment list, and choose + Save All. You can then specify the location where you want all the + attachments to be saved.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Deleting Messages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Deleting POP or IMAP Messages

+ +

How you delete messages depends on your mail server type: POP or IMAP. + Deleted POP messages are automatically moved to the Trash folder. IMAP users + can set different options for deleting messages.

+ +

To delete messages from your Inbox or other folders, begin from the Mail + window:

+ +
    +
  1. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete. By default, + Mail & Newsgroups moves the selected messages to the Trash folder.
    2. +
  2. To delete messages permanently, open the File menu and choose Empty + Trash.
    3. +
+ +

To delete messages without opening them, begin from the Mail window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the View menu and choose Layout, and then uncheck Message Pane. + +

    Alternatively, click the Message Pane handle (the ridged area centered + at the bottom of the message list) to close the message pane.

    +
    2. +
  2. In the message list, select the messages and click Delete.
    3. +
+ +

To set deletion preferences for IMAP messages:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings. You + see the Mail & Newsgroups Account Settings dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Locate the IMAP account you want, and then click the Server Settings + category under the account name.
    3. +
  3. Select the options + you want for deleting messages and click OK.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Moving Messages To and From the + Trash

+ +

If you use a POP server to deliver your mail, or if you set up IMAP to use + the Trash folder, follow these steps to delete messages from your Inbox or + other folders:

+ +
    +
  1. In the message list, select the messages you want to delete.
    2. +
  2. Click Delete. Mail & Newsgroups moves the messages to the Trash + folder.
    3. +
+ +

To recover messages from the Trash:

+ +
    +
  1. Click the Trash folder.
    2. +
  2. Select the messages you want to recover and drag them to another + folder.
    3. +
+ +

To delete messages permanently:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/nav_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/nav_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a8372b2b38 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/nav_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,1440 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Browsing the Web + + + + +

Browsing the Web

+ +

Welcome to &brandShortName;! One of the most popular ways people use + &brandShortName; is to browse the Web. The &brandShortName; browser + component that lets you visit web pages, offers many ways to visit web pages + and search the Web.

+ +

This section introduces you to the browser, and how you can use it to + navigate, search, and save web pages.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Navigating Web Pages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Viewing Your Home Page

+ +

After the first launch, you will normally see your home page when you launch + &brandShortName;. Unless you choose a home page yourself, your home page is + chosen by your network or Internet service provider, or you see + &brandShortName;'s home page.

+ +

To choose your own home page, see + Specifying + How &brandShortName; Starts Up.

+ +

Tips:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Moving to Another Page

+ +

You move to a new page by typing its URL—its location (address) on the + Web. URLs normally begin with http://, followed by one or more + names that identify the address. For instance, + http://www.mozilla.org.

+ +
    +
  1. Click the Location Bar to select the URL that is already there.
    2. +
  2. Type the URL of the page you want to visit. The URL you type replaces any + text already in the Location Bar.
    3. +
  3. Press ReturnEnter.
    4. +
+ +

Using the lock icon near the lower-right corner of the window, you can check + a web page's security status at any time. For details, see + Checking + Security for a Web Page.

+ +

Tip: To quickly select the URL in the Location Bar, press + CmdCtrl+L.

+ + + + + + + + +
Location Bar
Location Bar
+ +

Don't know a URL? You can type part of a URL, such as + cnn (for www.cnn.com); or you can type a general word, such as + gifts or flowers. The browser guesses what page you + want to view, or displays a page with a choice of links related to the word + you typed.

+ +

If you are new to the Internet, see the + Internet Guide.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + +

Most web pages contain links you can click to move to other pages.

+ +
    +
  1. Move the pointer until it changes to a pointing finger. This happens + whenever the pointer is over a link. Most links are underlined text, but + buttons and images can also be links.
    2. +
  2. Click the link once. While the network locates the page that the link + points to, status messages appear at the bottom of the window.
    3. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Retracing Your Steps

+ +

There are several ways to re-visit pages:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Navigation Buttons
BackForward
+ + + + + + + + + + +
Location Bar
Location Bar
+ + + +

Tip: The Sidebar History tab also allows you to choose from + pages you've visited during the past several sessions. For + information, see + Adding Sidebar Tabs. +

+ +

About History Lists

+ +

The history list contains links to recently visited pages. The Location Bar + list contains links to pages you've typed into the Location Bar and then + visited.

+ +

To access the history list from the browser, open the Go menu and choose + History. To access the Location Bar list, click the arrow at the right end of + the Location Bar.

+ +

Tip: To quickly open the history list, press + Cmd+ShiftCtrl+H.

+ +

If you don't want the Location Bar or history list to display the pages + you've been visiting, you can clear the history list and Location Bar + history entirely or selectively.

+ +

To delete all pages from the Location Bar or history list, begin from the + browser window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the + &brandShortName;Edit + menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click History. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. Click Clear History and Clear Location Bar to remove all previously + visited web pages from the lists.
    4. +
+ +

To selectively delete pages from the history list, do any of the + following:

+ + + +

Tip: To sort the history list, click one of the categories + (Title, Location, or Last Visited). Click the title again to reverse the + order.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Reopening Closed Tabs or Windows

+ +

&brandShortName; keeps track of your most recently closed tabs and + windows and allows you to get back to them easily.

+ +

To reopen closed tabs:

+ + + +

Similarly, to reopen closed windows:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Stopping and Reloading

+ +

If a page is taking too long to appear, or you change your mind and + don't want to view it, click the Stop button.

+ +

To refresh the current page, or get the most up-to-date version, click the + Reload button, or press + CmdCtrl+R.

+ + + + + + + + + + +
Navigation Buttons
ReloadStop
+ +

To refresh the current page and reset all changes made (if the page contains + a form), hold down the Shift key and click the Reload button, or + press CmdCtrl+Shift+R.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Visiting Bookmarked Pages

+ +

The addresses, or URLs, of web pages can be quite long and difficult to + remember. Fortunately, it's not necessary to memorize URLs in order to + browse the Web. Your browser has a list of bookmarks, which are pointers to + interesting web pages.

+ +

To go to a bookmarked page, begin from the Browser window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu. The menu contains bookmarks represented by a + bookmark icon, and folders that contain more bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. To visit a bookmarked page, choose a bookmark from the menu, or open a + folder and choose a bookmark.
    3. +
+ +

Tip: To retrace your steps, click the Back arrow.

+ +

You can save your own bookmarks to point to pages you frequently visit, or + to other interesting places on the Web. See + Creating New + Bookmarks for more information.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Using Tabbed Browsing

+ +

When you visit more then one web page at a time, you can use Tabbed Browsing + to navigate the Web faster and easier.

+ +

Tabbed Browsing lets you open tabs, each displaying a web page, within a + single browser window. You don't have to have several windows open to + visit several different web pages. This frees up space on your desktop. You + can open, close, and reload web pages conveniently in one place without + having to switch to another window.

+ +

You can manage your navigation tabs easily and control when tabs are opened + automatically. For more information about setting Tabbed Browsing + preferences, see + Browser Preferences + - Tabbed Browsing.

+ +

To learn more about using Tabbed Browsing, see + Tabbed Browsing.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Using Sidebar

+ +

In addition to navigating the Web with the browser, you can let the Web come + to you by using Sidebar.

+ +

Sidebar is a customizable frame in your browser where you can keep items + that you need to use all the time, including your bookmarks, browser history, + address book, and other available options. Sidebar presents these items to + you in tabs that it continually updates.

+ +

&brandShortName; comes with some Sidebar tabs already set up, but you can + customize Sidebar by adding, removing, and rearranging tabs. For details, + see Sidebar.

+ +

To view an item in Sidebar, click its tab.

+ + + + + + + +
Sidebar HandleSidebar
Handle		If it is not already open, open Sidebar + by clicking its handle. If the handle is missing, open the View menu in + the browser, choose Show/Hide, and then Sidebar from the submenu.
+ +

Tip: To quickly open or close the Sidebar, + press F9.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Searching the Web

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Fast Searches

+ +

There are four ways to search quickly: from the Location Bar, from Sidebar, + from the Net Search page, and by selecting words in a web page.

+ +

Searching from the Location Bar

+ +

Searching for web pages on a particular topic is as easy as typing a + question, or just a word or two, into the browser's Location Bar, as + shown below.

+ +

+

+ +

For example, if you want to find information about baby dolls:

+ +
    +
  1. ClickDouble-click + in the Location Bar to select the current text.
    2. +
  2. Type the word baby doll. Your typing replaces the current + text.
    3. +
  3. Perform one of these steps: +
      +
    • Click the Search button search button.
      • +
    • Click Search DuckDuckGo for baby doll at the bottom of + the drop-down list in the Location Bar. (Your default search engine may + be different.) + +

      The default search engine you choose in the + Internet + Search Preferences is used. Search results for baby doll + appear in the browser window. Click the links to visit web pages + about baby dolls.

      +
      • +
    +
    4. +
+ +

Note: In the Unknown Locations section of the + Location Bar + Preferences, you can set up the Location Bar so a search is automatically + performed if the text you have typed is not a web location. Typing a word in + the Location Bar and pressing Enter + Return will then perform a search.

+ +

Searching from Sidebar

+ +

The Sidebar Search tab lets you keep a search bar in your sidebar. + For example, if you want to find information about toy cars:

+ +
    +
  1. If it is not already open, open Sidebar by clicking its handle. If the + handle is missing, press F9 or open + the View menu in the browser, choose Show/Hide, and then Sidebar from the + submenu.
    2. +
  2. Click the Search tab in Sidebar.
    3. +
  3. Open the drop-down list, and choose a search engine.
    4. +
  4. Type toy car in the search field.
    5. +
  5. Click Search. Search results for 'toy car' appear in the + browser window. Click the links to visit web pages about toy cars.
    6. +
+ +

See Sidebar for more information + on how to use Sidebar.

+ +

Searching from your search engine's + home page

+ +

You can also perform a search from your search engine's home page. + To visit this page, perform one of these steps:

+ + + +

Searching on Selected Words + in a Web Page

+ +

&brandShortName; allows you to search for words you select within a web + page:

+ +
    +
  1. Select (highlight) any words in a web page.
    2. +
  2. Right-click or, if you have a one-button mouse, + Ctrl-click and choose Search Web for + [your selected words] for the menu.
    3. +
+ +

&brandShortName; opens a new window or tab (depending on your preferences) + and uses your default search engine to search for your selected words. To + learn how to change the search engine used to search for your selected words + and the way your search results are displayed, see + Browser Preferences + - Internet Search.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Setting Search Preferences

+ +

You can choose a different search engine as the default. You can also + specify how you want search results displayed.

+ +
    +
  1. Open the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Browser category, click Internet Search. (If no subcategories + are visible, double-click the Browser to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. Under Default Search Engine, choose a search engine you want to use for + web searching.
    4. +
  4. Click Manage Search Engines to open the Manage Search Engine List + dialog, where you can select Show search suggestions if you want + &brandShortName; to show suggestions from the search engine as you type a + search string in the Sidebar search tab or in the Search Bar. Then click OK + to save any changes and close this dialog.
    5. +
  5. Under Search Results, select Open new tabs for sidebar search + results if you want to see the results from Sidebar searches to open in + a new tab instead of the current tab.
    6. +
  6. Under Search Results, select Open a tab instead of a window for a + context menu web search if you want search results to open in a new tab + instead of a new window when you search for selected words.
    7. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Searching Within a Page

+ +

To find text within the page you are currently viewing in the browser:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Edit menu and choose Find in This Page. If the page + you are viewing contains frames, you may need to click within a frame + before you begin your search. You see the Find bar.
    2. +
  2. Type the text you want to find.
    3. +
  3. Click Next to begin the search from where the cursor is forwards + to the bottom of the page.
    4. +
  4. Click Previous to begin the search from the cursor backwards to + the top of the page.
    5. +
  5. With Highlight all, all words or phrases that + matched are highlighted on the page.
    6. +
  6. Use Match case to limit the search to words or + phrases that exactly match what you typed (taking case into + account).
    7. +
+ +

If the search hits the bottom (or top) of the page, it will continue + from the other end and indicate on the Find bar that it wrapped.

+ +

To find the same word or phrase again, keep pressing Enter while the + focus is on the search field, or use the Find Again shortcuts (see + the Using Find-as-you-type section below) when the focus + is on the page. In both cases, a forward search will be invoked, + no matter whether the Previous button was used the last time.

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Using Find-as-you-type

+ +

Other than searching text through the Find bar, you can also search by + typing directly into a Web page.

+ +
    +
  1. To search for a link, type several characters into the active browser + window to navigate to any link with that text in it. + +

    If you repeat the same character, it will start to cycle through all + the links that begin with that character. However, if it can find a + match with the exact string you've typed, such as + oo in woods, it will go there + first.

    +
    2. +
  2. To search for all text (normal text and linked text), type / + before your search string. For example, type /hello to + search any text containing the string hello.
    3. +
  3. The status bar (at the bottom of your browser window) displays your + search string and whether or not the search was successful. Please note + that this happens only if the Show the find toolbar during find as you + type checkbox on the Find + As You Type preferences panel is not selected. If the checkbox is + selected, then the Find bar is used instead of changing the status + bar.
    4. +
  4. Use the backspace key to undo the last character typed.
    5. +
  5. To cancel a find, change focus or scroll, press Escape, or wait for the + timeout.
    6. +
  6. Press + CmdCtrl+G or + F3 to find the same search text again. Press + CmdCtrl+Shift+G or + Shift+F3 to find previous occurrence of the search + text.
    7. +
+ +

Type Ahead Find works with any window, such as this help file (try it!).

+ +

This feature also works with international characters such as Chinese and + Japanese.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Searching the Bookmarks or + History List

+ +

To search the bookmarks list, begin from the browser window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks. You see your + Bookmarks window.
    2. +
  2. In the Bookmarks window, open the Tools menu and choose Search Bookmarks. + You see the Find Bookmarks dialog box.
    3. +
  3. Use the drop-down lists to select options to define your search. Choose + from the following search options: +
      +
    • Choose name, location, description, or + keyword to choose where you would like to search.
      • +
    • Choose contains, starts with, or ends + with if you know only part of the word or phrase for which + you're searching.
      • +
    • Choose is if you know exactly what you're searching + for.
      • +
    • Choose is not or doesn't contain to + exclude pages.
      • +
    • Click in the field and type all or part of search word or URL (web + address) for the bookmarks that you want to find or exclude.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Click Find. Bookmarks that match your search criteria are displayed in + the Search Results-Bookmarks window.
    5. +
+ +

Tip: To quickly open the Bookmark Manager, press + CmdCtrl+B.

+ +

To search the History list:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Go menu and choose History. You see the history list.
    2. +
  2. Above the actual list, you see a textbox titled Search History.
    3. +
  3. Click into this textbox and type parts of the URL or page title you are + searching for.
    4. +
  4. The History list is filtered for those search terms as you type them.
    5. +
+ +

To use the search results:

+ + + +

Tips:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Copying, Saving, and Printing + Pages

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Copying Part of a Page

+ +

To copy some text from a page, begin from the browser window:

+ +
    +
  1. Select the text.
    2. +
  2. Open the Edit menu and choose Copy.
    3. +
+ +

You can paste the text into other programs.

+ +

To copy a link (URL) or an image link from a page:

+ +
    +
  1. Position the pointer over the link or image.
    2. +
  2. Right-click or, if you have a one-button mouse, + Ctrl-click, the link or image to display a pop-up + menu.
    3. +
  3. Choose Copy Link Location or Copy Image Location. If an image is also a + link, you are offered both options.
    4. +
+ +

You can paste the link into other programs or into browser's Location + Bar.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Saving All or Part of a Page

+ +

To save an entire page, begin from the browser window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the File menu and choose Save Page As. You see the Save As dialog + box.
    2. +
  2. Choose a folder in which to save this file.
    3. +
  3. Choose a format for the page you want to save: +
      +
    • Web Page, Complete: Save the whole web page, along + with images and other supporting files. This option allows you to view + it as originally displayed with images. &brandShortName; creates a new + directory (where the page is saved) to save images and other files + necessary to show the whole web page.
      • +
    • Web Page, HTML Only: Save the original page as-is + without images.
      • +
    • Text file: Save the original page as a text file. + This option will not preserve the original HTML link structure, but + will allow you to see a text version of the web page in any text + editor.
      • +
    +
    4. +
  4. Type a file name for the page and click Save.
    5. +
+ +

When you view a page containing frames and a frame is currently selected, + the Save Frame As option is offered in the drop-down list in addition to Save + Page As. This lets you save only the page within the selected frame.

+ +

Saving a file onto your hard drive lets you view the page (or its HTML code) + when you're not connected to the Internet.

+ +

To save an image from a page:

+ +
    +
  1. Position the mouse pointer over the image.
    2. +
  2. Right-click or, if you have a one-button mouse, + Ctrl-click the image to display a pop-up menu.
    3. +
  3. Choose Save Image As. You see the Save File dialog box.
    4. +
  4. Choose a folder in which to save this image.
    5. +
  5. Type a file name for the image and click Save.
    6. +
+ +

To save a page without displaying it (which is useful for retrieving a + non-formatted page, like a data file, that's not intended for + viewing):

+ +
    +
  1. Position the mouse pointer over the page's link.
    2. +
  2. Right-click or, if you have a one-button mouse, + Ctrl-click the hyperlink on the page to display a pop-up + menu.
    3. +
  3. Choose Save Link Target As. You see the Save File dialog box.
    4. +
  4. Choose a folder in which to save this file.
    5. +
  5. Type a file name for the page and click Save.
    6. +
+ +

Important: Some links automatically download and save files + to your hard drive after you click them. The URLs for these links often begin + with ftp or end with a file-type extension such as au + or mpeg. These links might transmit software, sound, or movie + files, and can launch helper applications that support the files.

+ +

Tip: To set an image as + your desktop wallpaper on Windows, right-click on an image and choose Set As + Wallpaper from the pop-up menu.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Printing a Page

+ +

To print the current page, begin from the browser window:

+ + + +

To print selected text, begin from the browser window:

+ + + +

The size of the printed page, not the size of the onscreen window, + determines placement of content on the printed page. Text is wrapped and + graphics are repositioned to accommodate paper size.

+ +
+ + + +

To have an early look at how a page will look before it is + printed, you can use Print Preview. Begin from the browser window:

+ +
    +
  • Open the File menu and choose Print Preview.
    • +
+ +

In Print Preview, you have the following options:

+ +
    +
  • Print: Click this to print pages.
    • +
  • Page Setup: Click to further customize pages + you want to print.
    • +
  • Page [__] of X: Enter a page number (less than X) to + jump to its preview. Click the First + first button, + Previous previous button, Next + next button, + or Last + last button button + to move between pages.
    • +
  • Scale: Changes the scale (size) of pages, + using the dropdown list. You can choose between a fixed percentage of the + original page and two special options: +
      +
    • Shrink To Fit Page Width: Select this to + automatically resize the page to the width of the paper.
      • +
    • Custom: Type in the percentage of the original size + and press Enter. For example, type 50 and press Enter to make + each page half the size of the original page.
      • +
    +
    • +
  • Portrait: Click on this to position the page + normally, with the shorter side facing up.
    • +
  • Landscape: Click on this to position the + page sideways, with the longer side facing up.
    • +
  • Close: Click on this to close the Print Preview + dialog.
    • +
+ +
+ +

Using Page Setup

+ +

Note: Some Page Setup functions are different or + unavailable on macOS, Linux or Unix.

+ +

To customize how pages are printed in &brandShortName;, you can use Page + Setup. From the browser, open the File menu and choose Page Setup.

+ +

In Page Setup, you can change the following settings for pages you want to + print:

+ + + +

Tip: To see a preview of changes made to Page + Setup, use Print Preview.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Using Languages and + International Content

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Selecting Text Encodings and + Fonts

+ +

If you browse, compose, or send and receive email in more than one language, + you need to select the appropriate text encodings and fonts.

+ +

A text encoding method is the way characters in a document or message are + converted to data to be used by your computer. All web documents and mail or + news messages use a text encoding method (also known as a character set, + character coding, or charset).

+ +

The text encoding method for a document may depend on its language. + Some languages e.g. most West European languages, share the same encoding + method. Others such as Chinese, Japanese, and Russian use different methods. + In contrast, Unicode provides language-independent encoding methods. UTF-8, + for example, can be used for any language document.

+ +

Your version of &brandShortName; is set to a default text encoding which is + appropriate for your region. However, if you use more than one language, you + may need to select appropriate text encoding methods and designate the fonts + you wish to use for your language.

+ +

To select text encodings, begin from the browser window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the View menu, choose Text Encoding, and then choose More + Encodings.
    2. +
  2. Choose a region from the top section of the submenu.
    3. +
  3. Choose a text encoding within the region submenu. Repeat steps 1-3 for + each text encoding method you want.
    4. +
+ +

The text encoding methods you select are added to the Text Encoding menu. + If you have more than one encoding method selected, the active one has a + bullet (dot) next to it.

+ +

If the page, which you are viewing, shows wrong character glyphs with all + predefined text encodings, there is a chance that it requires special fonts. + Such websites should contain instructions on which fonts to download and/or + use in order to view the page correctly. When you have the necessary fonts + installed on your system, you can choose User Defined from the More Encodings + submenu. &brandShortName; will then use the fonts defined in the Fonts preferences (Fonts for: + User Defined).

+ +

&brandShortName; can detect which text encoding a document uses, and can + display it correctly on your screen. To take advantage of this capability, + begin from the browser window:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the View menu, choose Text Encoding, and then choose + Auto-Detect.
    2. +
  2. Choose one of the Auto-Detect options, or choose (Off) from the + submenu.
    3. +
+ +

To make changes to your list of active text encodings:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the View menu, choose Text Encoding, and then choose Customize + List. You can see the Customize Text Encoding dialog box.
    2. +
  2. Choose from the following procedures: +
      +
    • To add to the list of active text encodings, choose a text encoding + from the list on the left and click Add.
      • +
    • To remove a text encoding from the active list, choose a text + encoding from the list on the right and click Remove.
      • +
    • To change the order in which active encodings appear in the Text + Encoding menu, highlight text encodings in the list on the right, + and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the text encodings + up or down in the list.
      • +
    +
    3. +
+ +

To change the default fonts within a language group:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Appearance category, click Fonts. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Appearance to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. From the Fonts for drop-down list, choose a language + group/script. For instance, to set default fonts for West European + languages/script, choose Western.
    4. +
  4. Select whether proportional text should be serif (like Times Roman) or + sans serif (like Arial). You can also specify what font size you want for + proportional text. Proportional text varies in width.
    5. +
  5. (If available) Select a font for Serif, Sans-Serif, Cursive, and + Fantasy.
    6. +
  6. Select the monospace font (like Courier) that you want to use for web + pages. Monospace text is fixed in width, so each character or letter takes + the same amount of space.
    7. +
+ +

Many web page authors choose their own fonts and font sizes. You can use the + author's font settings by selecting Allow documents to use other + fonts.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Setting Language Preferences

+ +

The language you use for &brandShortName; affects the user + interface—text of buttons, dialog boxes, menus, tools, and other items. + You can download and install language packages from the + SeaMonkey Project + Releases page and then use the + Appearance Preferences + panel to switch user interface language.

+ +

A web page can sometimes be available in several languages. In the + Languages Preferences + panel, you can configure &brandShortName; so the page is shown in the + language you prefer. You can have multiple languages and list them in order + of preference.

+ +

[Return to beginning + of section]

+ +

Finding a &brandShortName; version in your + own language

+ +

If you're looking for a version of &brandShortName; in a language other + than American English, you can download it from the + SeaMonkey + Project Releases page.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Plugins and Downloads

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

The browser can handle many types of files. However, for some files, such as + movies or music, &brandShortName; needs plugins or helper applications + that can handle those files. If the browser doesn't have the needed + helper application or plugin, it can still save the file to your hard disk. + When saving files, you can keep track of them using Download Manager.

+ +

Plugins

+ +

Plugins are helper applications that extend the functionality within the + browser and run within &brandShortName;. Plugins allow &brandShortName; to + show multimedia files and run small applications, such as movies, animations, + and games.

+ +

&brandShortName; comes with no additional plugins installed, so you have + to add them separately.

+ +

To see what plugins you currently have installed, do any of the following: +

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Helper Applications

+ +

When files can not be used within &brandShortName;, you have the option to + launch helper applications that open outside of &brandShortName;. For + example, to play MP3 files, programs like Winamp can be opened outside of + &brandShortName;.

+ +

The settings for this are explained in detail in + Preferences + - Helper Applications.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Download Manager

+ +

You can use Download Manager to keep track of files you download. Download + Manager shows the following information:

+ + + +

To open Download Manager, do the following:

+ + + +

The following menu options are available in Download Manager:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Improving Speed and Efficiency

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Automatic Loading

+ +

When you bring a web page to your screen, &brandShortName; automatically + loads (starts up) several features that help interpret web pages. These + features, like JavaScript, can make web pages more lively, but they take + time to load.

+ +

To learn how to turn off JavaScript, see + Advanced + Preferences - Scripts & Plugins.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Using Custom Bookmark Keywords

+ +

Bookmark keywords allow you to create shorthand aliases for bookmarks and + Web searches. For example, if you give the bookmark to http://www.mozilla.org + the keyword m.o, you can enter m.o in the Location Bar and + the browser will load http://www.mozilla.org.

+ +

To set a keyword, you must first create a bookmark for the URL. Then,

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Bookmarks menu and choose Manage Bookmarks.
    2. +
  2. In the Bookmarks window, click on the bookmark that you created.
    3. +
  3. Click Properties.
    4. +
  4. In the bookmark Properties dialog box window, enter a short string into + the Keyword field and close that dialog.
    5. +
+ +

Now, you can enter the keyword in the Location Bar, and &brandShortName; + will load that URL.

+ +

Search with Keywords

+ +

Custom keywords can be used to create shortcuts for your favorite search + engines, too. For example, you can create a keyword so that entering + g Lord of the Rings will perform a Google I-Feel-Lucky search + on Lord of the Rings.

+ +

To create a custom keyword for use with a Web search:

+ +
    +
  1. Go to your search form (e.g. www.google.com).
    2. +
  2. Enter a dummy search string (e.g. ILoveMozilla).
    3. +
  3. Submit the search query.
    4. +
  4. After the results have loaded, open the Bookmarks menu and choose File + Bookmark.
    5. +
  5. In the File Bookmark dialog, look the Location field. Replace the + dummy string (e.g. ILoveMozilla) with %s. + For example, the location might become + http://www.google.com/search?q=%s&btnI=I'mFeelingLucky.
    6. +
  6. Enter a keyword in the Keyword field.
    7. +
  7. Give the bookmark a name and choose the location for the bookmark.
    8. +
  8. Close the dialog.
    9. +
+ +

Now you can search without going to the search page first by entering + keyword search_words in the Location Bar. +

+ +

For more details and examples, see + "Using keyword + searches" at the MozillaZine Knowledge Base.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Changing Cache Settings

+ +

Your computer stores copies of frequently accessed pages in the cache. This + way, the computer doesn't have to retrieve the page from the network + each time you view it.

+ +

To set the size of the cache or to clear it:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. Enter a number in the Size field to specify the size of the cache. 50 MB + is sufficient. To clear the cache immediately, click Clear Cache.
    4. +
+ +

Important: A larger disk cache allows more pages to be + quickly retrieved, but more of your hard disk space is used.

+ +

When you quit &brandShortName;, it performs cache maintenance. If + maintenance takes longer than you wish, try reducing the size of the disk + cache.

+ +

To specify how often the browser checks the network for page revisions (so + that you don't keep stale pages in the cache too long):

+ +
    +
  1. Open the + &brandShortName; Edit + menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Advanced category, click Cache. (If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Advanced to expand the list.)
    3. +
  3. Choose from the following options: +
      +
    • Every time I view the page: Select this if you want + &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache every time you view + it.
      • +
    • When the page is out of date: Select this if you + want &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache when the page + is determined by the server to have expired.
      • +
    • Once per session: Select this if you want + &brandShortName; to compare a web page to the cache once for each time + you start &brandShortName;.
      • +
    • Never: Select this if you do not want + &brandShortName; to compare cached information to the network.
      • +
    +
    4. +
+ +

If pages that should be in the cache are taking longer to appear than they + should, make sure the preference is not set to Every time I view the + page, because the verification requires a network connection that takes + time.

+ +

To refresh a page at any time:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Getting the Latest Software + Automatically

+ +

&brandShortName; can notify you when updates for your software are + available, and it can install the updates automatically. &brandShortName; can + also inform you when new versions of &brandShortName; and installed add-ons + are available.

+ +

To learn about setting up automatic software installation, see + Advanced + Preferences - Software Installation.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ +

Using a Mouse Wheel

+ +

If your mouse has a mouse wheel, you can control how the mouse wheel + functions in &brandShortName;.

+ +

To learn more about setting up a mouse wheel, see + Advanced Preferences - + Mouse Wheel.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+ + +
+ +

Making &brandShortName; Your + Default Browser

+ +

&brandShortName; is best known for displaying web pages, both on the + Internet and on your computer. To easily open web pages, you can make + &brandShortName; your default browser.

+ +

Common Internet Files and + Protocols

+ +

Making &brandShortName; your default browser allows it to automatically + open common file formats and protocols used on the Internet. Common + Internet file formats and protocols include the following:

+ +
    +
  • Image Files: +
      +
    • JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP and ICO
      • +
    +
    • +
  • Internet Document and Language Files: + +
    • +
  • Internet Protocols: + +
    • +
+ +

Changing Default + Browser Settings Automatically

+ +

After installation is finished, &brandShortName; checks to see if it is + the default browser for any of the common Internet file formats or + protocols. If it isn't, you are asked, &brandShortName; is not + currently set as your default browser. Would you like to make it your + default browser?

+ +

Click Yes to make &brandShortName; the default browser. If you click No, + you will be prompted with this question each time &brandShortName; + starts, unless you deselect the checkbox Check at startup next time, + too.

+ +

If you deselect the checkbox, Check at startup next time, too, + you can still make &brandShortName; the default browser by changing your + settings in Preferences. To learn how to set &brandShortName; as the + default browser through &brandShortName; preferences, see + Browser Preferences - + Browser.

+ +

[Return to beginning of + section]

+
+ +

Proxies

+ +

Many organizations block access from the Internet to their networks. This + prevents outside parties from gaining access to sensitive information. The + protection is called a firewall.

+ +

If your organization has a firewall, the browser may need to go through a + proxy server before connecting you to the Internet. The proxy server prevents + outsiders from breaking into your organization's private network.

+ +

For information on setting your proxy preferences, see + Advanced Preferences - + Proxies.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/page_info_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/page_info_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fc923263dc --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/page_info_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Viewing Page Info + + + + +

Viewing Page Info

+ +

The Page Info dialog box consists of several tabs that display different + kinds of information about the page you are viewing. This section provides a + brief overview of the information available in each tab.

+ +

To view Page Info for the page currently displayed by the browser, open the + View menu and choose Page Info. You can then click the tab that corresponds + to the kind of information you want to view.

+ +

Most of the information displayed by the General, Media, Forms and Links + tabs in Page Info is taken from the HTML source for the page. This + information is usually of interest only to web developers and other + specialists.

+ +

For detailed information about HTML, including the tags displayed by Page + Info, see the HTML 4.01 + Specification.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

General (Page Info Tab)

+ +

When you choose Page Info from the View menu, the General tab displays basic + information about the page that you are viewing in the browser.

+ +

The top portion displays the following information:

+ + + +

The Meta portion displays the metatags specified by the page. Metatags + provide information about the type of content displayed by a page, such as a + general description of the page, keywords for search engines, copyright + information, and so on.

+ +

The Security information for this page portion contains security + information concerning ownership and encryption. More details are available in + the Security tab.

+ +

Media (Page Info Tab)

+ +

When you choose Page Info from the View menu and click the Media tab, you + see a list of all the images and other media elements displayed by the + page.

+ +

The top portion lists basic information about each element, including its + address (URL) and type.

+ +

When you select a media element listed in the top portion of the Media tab, + the bottom portion displays available information about that element, such as + description, size, or dimensions.

+ +

You can also see the selected element at the bottom of the dialog box. To + see larger images, you need to click the lower-right corner of the Page Info + dialog box and drag.

+ +

To save a media element as a separate file:

+ + + +

Forms (Page Info Tab)

+ +

When you choose Page Info from the View menu and click the Forms tab, you + see information about all the forms displayed by the page you are currently + viewing in the browser.

+ +

The top portion lists basic information about the way each form in the page + is specified in the HTML source:

+ + + +

When you select a form listed in the top portion of the Forms tab, the + bottom portion displays detailed information about the way each of that + form's elements is specified in the HTML source:

+ + + + + +

When you choose Page Info from the View menu and click the Links tab, you + see a list of all the links available on that page. The following information + is displayed for each link:

+ + + +

Security (Page Info Tab)

+ +

When you choose Page Info from the View menu and click the Security tab, you + see information about + authentication and + encryption for the web page you are + viewing. The top portion indicates whether the website's identity has + been verified, and the bottom portion describes whether the page was + encrypted when it was received by the browser.

+ +

You can also open the Security tab directly by clicking the lock icon in the + lower-right corner of any browser window.

+ +

The top portion of the Security tab can display any of these messages:

+ + + +

The bottom portion of the Security tab can display any of these + messages:

+ + + +

Lack of any encryption or lack of strong encryption should be of concern + only if you are sending or viewing confidential information, such as your + credit card number.

+ +

You can quickly check the encryption status of a web page by noting the + state of the lock icon at the bottom-right corner of the browser window. For + more details, see + Checking + Security for a Web Page.

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/passwords_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/passwords_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4eff45a2a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/passwords_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,407 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Password Settings + + + + +

Password Settings

+ +

This section describes how to set your password preferences, set your Master + Password, and control other aspects of password handling.

+ +

For step-by-step descriptions of various tasks related to passwords, see + Using the Password + Manager.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Privacy & Security Preferences - Passwords

+ +

This section describes the Passwords preferences panel. If you're not + already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ +

Password Manager

+ +

Password Manager preferences allow you to

+ + + +

For detailed information about using Password Manager, including how to + override it for individual websites and how to view and manage stored + passwords, + see Using the + Password Manager.

+ +

Master Passwords

+ +

A master password protects a security device, which is a software or + hardware device that stores sensitive information associated with your + identity, such as keys or certificates.

+ +

For example, the browser has a built-in Software Security Device, and you + can also use external security devices, such as smart cards, if your computer + is configured to use them.

+ +

The master password for the browser's built-in Software Security Device + also protects stored sensitive information such as email passwords, website + passwords, and other data stored by the Password Manager.

+ +

Each security device, whether it is software or hardware, has its own + separate Master Password.

+ + + +

Encrypting Versus Obscuring

+ +

If you use Password Manager to save passwords and personal data, this + sensitive information is stored on your computer in a file that's + difficult, but not impossible, for an intruder to read. This way of storing + information is sometimes described as obscuring. This is the default + setting that applies to information stored by Password Manager.

+ +

For improved protection, you may choose to protect the file with encryption. + Encryption makes it more difficult (but again, not impossible) for an + unauthorized person to view your stored sensitive information. To turn on + encryption you need to set a master + password.

+ +

Using encryption versus obscuring for stored sensitive data is a tradeoff + between improved security and convenience:

+ + + +

For more details, see + Encrypting + Stored Sensitive Information.

+ +

Password Manager

+ +

This section describes how to use the Password Manager dialog box to control + your stored passwords. If you are not already viewing it, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
  3. Click Manage Stored Passwords.
    4. +
+ +

Alternatively, open the Tools menu, choose Password Manager, and then choose + Manage Stored Passwords from the submenu.

+ +

The Password Manager has two tabs:

+ +
    +
  1. Passwords Saved: Click this tab to view the list of + websites for which Password Manager has saved your user name and + password—that is, the websites for which you selected Yes + in response to Password Manager's request to store logon + information. + +

    The second column shows the user name for each website. If the password + is stored in encrypted form, (encrypted) appears after the user + name.

    + +

    By default, stored passwords are not displayed.

    + +
      +
    • To see the list of stored passwords, click Show Passwords and confirm + your choice.
      • +
    • To hide the passwords, click Hide Passwords.
      • +
    + +

    If you remove an entry from the list, the stored user name and password + will be discarded, and you will need to log in manually the next time you + visit that website.

    +
    2. +
  2. Passwords Never Saved: Click this tab to view the list + of websites for which you selected Never for this site in response + to Password Manager's request to store logon information. + +

    If a website is included on this list, you will always have to type in + your user name and password manually when you log onto the website.

    + +

    If you remove an entry from this list, Password Manager will again ask + you, the next time you log onto the website, whether to store your user + name and password.

    +
    3. +
+ +

Regardless of which tab you are viewing, you can remove entries from the + list as follows:

+ + + +

For more information about the Password Manager, see Using the Password + Manager.

+ +

Change Master Password

+ +

You must remember your old master password to change it with the Change + Password button.

+ +

This section describes the Change Master Password dialog box. If you're + not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
  3. Click Change Password.
    4. +
+ +

A master password protects a security device, which is a software or + hardware device that stores sensitive information associated with your + identity, such as keys or certificates.

+ +

For example, the browser has a built-in Software Security Device, and you + can also use external security devices, such as smart cards, if your computer + is configured to use them.

+ +

The master password for the browser's built-in Software Security Device + also protects your master key. Your master key is used to encrypt sensitive + information such as email passwords, website passwords, and other data stored + by the Password Manager.

+ +

You use the Change Master Password dialog box to provide the following + information:

+ + + +

If someone uses your computer who knows or can guess your master password, + that person may be able to access websites while pretending to be you. This + can be dangerous—for example, if you manage your financial accounts + over the Internet.

+ +

Therefore, it's important to select a master password that's + difficult to guess. The password quality meter gives you a + rough idea of the quality of your password as you type it based on factors + such as length and the use of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, numbers, + and symbols. It does not guarantee, however, that no one will be able to + guess your password.

+ +

For further guidelines, see Choosing + a Good Password.

+ +

It's also important to record your master password in a safe + place—and not anywhere that's easily accessible + to someone else. If you forget this password, you may not be able to access + important information, such as websites that require passwords or + certificates stored on your computer.

+ +

Reset Master Password

+ +

Warning: If you reset your master password, you will + permanently erase all the encrypted web and email passwords, saved on your + behalf by Password Manager. You will also lose all your personal certificates + associated with the + Software Security Device.

+ +

To change your master password rather than resetting it, click the Change + Password button in the Passwords preferences panel.

+ +

This section describes the Reset Master Password dialog box. If you're + not already viewing it, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
  3. Click Reset Password.
    4. +
+ +

Warning: If you reset your master password, you will + permanently erase all encrypted web and email passwords, saved on your behalf + by Password Manager You will also lose all your personal certificates + associated with the + software security + device.

+ +

If you remember your master password and decide to change it, you can do so + without danger of losing any personal information. If you are viewing the + Reset Master Password alert and you decide you want to change your password + rather than resetting it, click Cancel to return to the Passwords + preferences panel, then click Change Password. For details, see + Change Master Password.

+ +

Resetting your master password is a last resort that you should use only if + you are absolutely sure you've forgotten it. The seriousness of the + situation depends on how much personal data your forgotten master password + protects.

+ +

Resetting your master password does not create a new password. Instead, it + removes all the data your old master password protects. You will be asked to + specify a new master password the next time the browser needs to store + personal information.

+ +

After you reset your master password, you may also want to re-save personal + information that you want to have prefilled in the future. For example, as + you browse you may want Password Manager to save website and email passwords + again. In addition, any personal certificates associated with the software + security device will be permanently erased and you will need to apply for new + ones.

+ +

Note for smart card users: Each smart card has its own + master password. The master password for a smart card protects only the data + on that smart card (such as personal certificates). You can normally change + the master password for a smart card (assuming that you remember it), but you + cannot reset it.

+ +

Choosing a Good Password

+ +

Choosing a good password will help in keeping your personal information + safe and private. To improve the security of your password, follow some + or all of these suggestions:

+ + + +

You should avoid personal information that could be guessed. So the + following common items should be avoided:

+ + + +

A good way to choose a secure but easily remembered password is to use the + first character of each word in a phrase. For instance, StNh*nbsS + stands for Surfing the Net has never been so Suite; the asterisk in + the middle is included for increased security. (Don't use this + password!)

+ +

To further protect your personal data, you are advised to follow these + simple rules:

+ + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privacy_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privacy_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..67ea412bfc --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privacy_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,343 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Privacy on the Internet + + + + +

Using Privacy Features

+ +

Your browser includes features you can use to enhance the privacy and + security of your personal information. The sections that follow describe how + your browser can help you control cookies, passwords, and images while you + are surfing the Internet.

+ +

For information about related &brandShortName; security features, see + Signing & Encrypting Messages and + Using Certificates.

+ +
Privacy topics: + +
+ +

Privacy on the Internet

+ +

This section summarizes some background information about privacy on the + Internet. It also describes several things you can do to help safeguard your + own privacy. It is not intended to provide a complete description of Internet + privacy issues.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

What Information + Does My Browser Give to a Website?

+ +

When your browser displays a web page—for example, each time you click + a link or type a URL, or when a web page is displayed in an email + message—it gives certain kinds of information to the website. This + information may include (but is not limited to) your operating environment, + your Internet address, and the page you're coming from.

+ +

Operating Environment

+ +

The website is told something about your operating environment, such as your + browser type and operating system. This helps the website present the page in + the best way for your screen. For example, the website might learn that you + use &brandShortName; 2.19 on a Windows 7 computer.

+ +

Internet Address

+ +

Your browser must tell the website your Internet address (also known as the + Internet Protocol, or IP address) so the website knows where to send the page + you are requesting. The website can't present the page you want to see + unless it knows your IP address.

+ +

Your IP address can be either temporary or fixed (static).

+ +

If you connect to the Internet through a standard modem that's attached + to your phone line, then your Internet service provider (ISP) may assign you + a temporary IP address each time you log on. You use the temporary IP address + for the duration of your Internet session—for example, until you sign + off or hang up your dial-up connection, or otherwise end your computer's + live connection with the Internet. Each ISP has many IP addresses, and they + assign the addresses at random to users.

+ +

If you have DSL, a cable modem, or a fiber-optic connection, you may have a + fixed IP address that you use every time you connect.

+ +

Your IP address is not the same as your email address.

+ +

Referring Page

+ +

The website is also told which page you were reading when you clicked a link + to see one of the website's pages. This allows the website to know which + website referred you. Or, as you traverse the website, it allows the website + to know which of its pages you came from.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

What Are Cookies, and How Do + They Work?

+ +

A cookie is a small bit of information used by some websites. When you + visit a website that uses cookies, the website might ask your browser to place + one or more cookies on your hard disk.

+ +

Later, when you return to the website, your browser sends back the cookies + that belong to the website.

+ +

When you are using the default cookie settings, this activity is invisible + to you, and you won't know when a website is setting a cookie or when + your browser is sending a website's cookie back. However, you can set + your preferences so that you will be asked before a cookie is set. For + information on how to do this, see + Privacy & Security Preferences - + Cookies.

+ +

How Do Websites Use Cookie Information?

+ +

Cookies allow a website to know something about your previous visits. For + example, if you typically search for local weather or purchase books at a + website, the website may use cookies to remember what city you live in or what + authors you like, so it can make your next visit easier and more useful.

+ +

Some websites publish privacy policies that describe how they use the + information they gather.

+ +

What Are Third-Party Cookies?

+ +

If your browser stores a website's cookie, it will return the cookie + only to that particular website. Your browser will not provide one website + with cookies set by another. Since a website can only receive its own cookies, + it can learn about your activities while you are at that website but not your + activities in general while surfing the Web.

+ +

But sometimes a website displays content that is hosted on another website. + That content can be anything from an image to text or an advertisement. + The other website that hosts such elements also has the ability to store a + cookie in your browser, even though you don't visit the website directly. +

+ +

Cookies that are stored by a website other than the one you are visiting are + called third-party cookies or foreign + cookies. Websites sometimes use third-party cookies with + transparent GIFs, which are special images that help websites + count users, track email responses, learn more about how visitors use the + website, or customize your browsing experience. (Transparent GIFs are also + known as web beacons or web bugs.)

+ +

If you want, you can adjust your + cookie preferences so that websites can store ordinary cookies but not + third-party ones, or only for those sites that you have previously visited. +

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Why and How Are Websites + Tracking Me?

+ +

Websites are frequently interested in how they are used and by whom. + Thus, they may perform analytics on your browsing behavior, either by + themselves, or by utilizing a third-party service.

+ +

Motivations for such user tracking may be a more personalized browsing + experience, e.g., by offering you services or products corresponding to your + previous browsing pattern, thus making it more likely that you are interested + in those. Third-party services are mostly interested in placing advertisements + that match your interests, thus making it more likely that you would click on + those ads, which in turn generates revenue.

+ +

Of course, this list isn't all inclusive, other reasons may exist to + track the user's browsing behavior. To summarize, the trade-off is:

+ + + +

What Are the Mechanisms of User Tracking?

+ +

There isn't any single tracking mechanism, rather several methods + exist. For example, a website may employ one or more of these methods:

+ + + +

What Can I Do to Prevent User Tracking?

+ +

In general, there is no complete protection against unwanted tracking of + one's browsing activities. However, there are a couple of ways to make + it harder to get tracked:

+ + + +

Note: The issues related to user tracking are complex. + This description is not intended to be complete but to provide you with some + basic information on this topic.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

How Can I Control Web + Pages in Email Messages?

+ +

You can disable cookies, images, and plugins completely (JavaScript is + always disabled) for web pages that are received as part of email + messages.

+ +

While it may be convenient to enable some or all of these capabilities when + you're browsing the web, they may not be necessary in single web pages + sent as attachments to messages.

+ +

For information on enabling or disabling cookies, images, and plugins in + email messages, see the following sections:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

How + Can I Make Sure Unauthorized People Don't Use Information About Me?

+ +

The best way to keep your information private is to read the privacy + policies for the websites you visit and the Internet services you use, and + to be cautious about giving out your personal information online.

+ +

The Internet is a public network. When you send your name, phone number, + address, and other personal information over the network (via a web page, + email, or any other method), it is possible that someone else may be able to + intercept it.

+ +

Here are some questions you might ask about a website's privacy + policy:

+ + + +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privsec_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privsec_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cd06ce1f44 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/privsec_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Privacy & Security Preferences + + + + +

Privacy & Security Preferences

+ +

The sections listed below describe the Privacy & Security preferences. + To see the preference panels, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Privacy & Security category. If no subcategories are + visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand the list, then + click the name for the preferences you want to view or change.
    3. +
+ +

For help with a panel's settings, click the appropriate link below.

+ +
Related sections: + +
+ +

Privacy & Security Preferences - + Privacy & Security

+ +

This section describes how to use the main Privacy & Security + preferences panel. If you're not already viewing it, follow these + steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Click the Privacy & Security category.
    3. +
+ +

User Tracking

+ +

These settings allow you to communicate your tracking preferences to + websites and to actively block tracking requests from known tracking + sites. User tracking refers + to websites (including advertisers, analytics providers, and social sites) + collecting and analyzing comprehensive data on your web browsing patterns, + thus affecting your privacy. For more information on this topic, see + Why and + How Are Websites Tracking Me? The following options are available in + this section:

+ + + +

Notes:

+ + + +

Location Aware Browsing

+ +

Websites may want to obtain more detailed information about the user's + location, e.g., to offer specific services close to the current position. For + that purpose, they can request the longitude and latitude (along with other + information like altitude and heading, as available) from a browser. + &brandShortName; will never provide that information without the user's + consent. However, a notification is displayed for a page that requests the + location at least the first time that this site is visited. The preferences + located in the center section of the Privacy + & Security panel allow you to disable this feature entirely:

+ + + +

Notes:

+ + + +

Safe Browsing

+ +

Some websites contain potentially dangerous content and may have been + reported as malicious. The preferences located in the lower section of the + Privacy & Security panel allow you + to select which types of reported websites will be blocked. If enabled, + &brandShortName; compares each website's address you are about to visit + against regularly updated lists. A warning is issued prior to actually + loading a reported website, thus giving you the opportunity to cancel the + loading process. The following options are available in this section:

+ + + +

When you are trying to visit a website that has been reported as malicious + (and the feature is enabled), you will see one of the following warnings:

+ + + +

No harm has been done at this point. Select one of the following options:

+ + + +

Important: The Safe Browsing feature is switched on by + default. It is not recommended to disable either function as this + may result in you visiting unsafe sites.

+ +

Note: If no warning is shown for a specific website, it + does not guarantee that this site is trustworthy; it just means + that it has not been reported. Attack and phishing websites may look + safe but are secretly trying to attack you or to steal personal information. + The website's owner or provider may not be aware that the site has been + compromised.

+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/profiles_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/profiles_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d79f9df4d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/profiles_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Managing Profiles + + + + +

Managing Profiles

+ +

If you use the Internet at home and at work, you may want to have access to + a different set of bookmarks, preferences, address books, email accounts, + Sidebar setup, and so on. Similarly, family members may want to share a copy + of the same browser software but keep their Internet identities separate.

+ +

The Profile Manager lets you create different profiles, each with its own + bookmarks, preferences, email settings, and so on. You automatically create a + default profile when you first install your browser software. After you + create one or more additional profiles, you will be asked which you want to + use each time you launch the browser.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Creating a New Profile

+ +

To create a profile:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Profile Manager: +
      +
    • If &brandShortName; is running: Open the Tools menu + and select Switch Profile.
      • +
    • If &brandShortName; is closed: + Open the Start menu and choose Programs, then &brandShortName;, then + Profile Manager. Hold down the + Option key while you're starting &brandShortName; from + the Finder or the Dock. Type the following at + the command line: ./mozilla -profilemanager
      • +
    +
    2. +
  2. Click Create Profile, read the Profile description, and then click + Next.
    3. +
  3. Enter a profile name. This can be anything you like, such as your real + name or a name that's related to what you use the profile for, such as + School.
    4. +
  4. Accept the default location for the new profile, or click the Choose + Folder button and navigate to the location you want.
    5. +
  5. If you have additional Language Packs installed, click + Select Language and choose the language you want.
    6. +
  6. Click Finish.
    7. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ +

Deleting or Renaming a Profile

+ +

You may want to delete profiles that you don't normally use. To delete + or rename an existing profile:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the Profile Manager: +
      +
    • If &brandShortName; is running: Open the Tools menu + and select Switch Profile. Note: You can't delete + the profile that is in use.
      • +
    • If &brandShortName; is closed: + Open the Start menu and choose Programs, then + &brandShortName;, then Profile Manager. Hold + down the Option key while you're starting + &brandShortName; from the Finder or the Dock. + Type the following at the command line: + ./mozilla -profilemanager
      • +
    +
    2. +
  2. To delete a profile, select its name and click Delete Profile. In the + confirmation box, choose one of the following options: +
      +
    • Delete files: Deletes the whole profile folder + with its stored data (bookmarks, preferences, email + accounts, and so on). Make sure that you won't need anything + from the profile in the future before you choose this option.
      • +
    • Don't delete files: Removes the profile from + the list of available profiles, but keeps the profile folder. By + choosing this option none of your profile's stored data will be + deleted.
      • +
    +
    3. +
  3. To rename a profile, select its name, click Rename Profile, and follow the + instructions.
    4. +
+ +

[Return to beginning of section]

+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ab8e3b7ea0 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,524 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +&brandShortName; Keyboard Shortcuts + + + + +

&brandShortName; Keyboard Shortcuts

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Using Shortcuts

+ +

This document uses the following format for listing shortcuts:

+ +

Example:

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
CopyCtrl+CCmd+CCtrl+C
+ +

To perform a command, press the buttons listed together at the same time. + For example, to copy in Windows, press Ctrl and C at the same time.

+ +

Tip: The plus sign (+) means that you must press two keys + surrounding the plus sign at the same time. If there is more than one plus + sign (such as Ctrl+Shift+C), it means that all three buttons surrounding the + plus sign must be pressed at the same time.

+ +

Abbreviations:

+ + + +

Note: Some keyboard shortcuts perform different functions + based on cursor location (focus). For example, if you press Home on Windows + while viewing a web page, &brandShortName; will move to the top of the web + page. However, if you press Home on Windows while the cursor is in a text + field, the cursor will go to the beginning of the text field.

+ +

General &brandShortName; Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
CopyCtrl+CCmd+CCtrl+C
PasteCtrl+VCmd+VCtrl+V
CutCtrl+XCmd+XCtrl+X
Select AllCtrl+ACmd+AAlt+A
Close WindowCtrl+WCmd+WCtrl+W
Delete Next WordCtrl+DelOpt+DelCtrl+Del
Go Up One PagePage UpPage UpPage Up
Go Down One Page Page DownPage DownPage Down
Go Up One LineUp ArrowUp ArrowUp Arrow
Go Down One LineDown ArrowDown ArrowDown Arrow
UndoCtrl+ZCmd+ZCtrl+Z
RedoCtrl+Y or Ctrl+Shift+ZCmd+Shift+ZCtrl+Y or Ctrl+Shift+Z
Focus Search FieldCtrl+F or Ctrl+KCmd+F or Cmd+KCtrl+F or Ctrl+K
FindCtrl+FCmd+FCtrl+F
Find AgainCtrl+G or F3Cmd+GCtrl+G
Find Links As You Type' (apostrophe)' (apostrophe)' (apostrophe)
Find Text As You Type///
Open Context MenuShift+F10Ctrl+SpaceShift+F10
+ Open Main Menu (switches to the first drop-down menu + at the top of the window) + Alt or F10(macOS: Controlled through keyboard preference in Control Panel)F10
Exit &brandShortName;Ctrl+QCmd+QCtrl+Q
Start BrowserCtrl+1Cmd+1Ctrl+1
Start Mail & NewsgroupsCtrl+2Cmd+2Ctrl+2
Start ComposerCtrl+4Cmd+4Ctrl+4
Start Address BookCtrl+5Cmd+5Ctrl+5
Start IRC ChatCtrl+6Cmd+6Ctrl+6
Open Add-ons ManagerCtrl+Shift+ACmd+Shift+ACtrl+Shift+A
Open Download ManagerCtrl+JCmd+JCtrl+J
Open Error ConsoleCtrl+Shift+JCmd+Shift+JCtrl+Shift+J
Open Help WindowF1Cmd+?F1
Turn on/off caret browsingF7F7 (if F7 is not programmed for another command)F7
+ +

Text Field Shortcuts

+ +

The following are keyboard commands for navigating and modifying text in a + text input field (e.g. the Location Bar). Except where indicated, these + commands also apply to Web pages and e-mail messages in caret browsing + mode.

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Move one line upUp ArrowUp ArrowUp Arrow
Move one line downDown ArrowDown ArrowDown Arrow
Move one character leftLeft ArrowLeft ArrowLeft Arrow
Move one character rightRight ArrowRight ArrowRight Arrow
Move to next wordCtrl+Right ArrowOpt+Right ArrowCtrl+Right Arrow
Move to previous wordCtrl+Left ArrowOpt+Left ArrowCtrl+Left Arrow
Move to beginning of lineHomeCmd+Left Arrow (in text fields only)Home
Move to end of lineEndCmd+Right Arrow (in text fields only)End
Move to beginning of textCtrl+HomeCmd+Up ArrowCtrl+Home
Move to end of textCtrl+EndCmd+Down ArrowCtrl+End
Select next characterShift+Right ArrowShift+Right ArrowShift+Right Arrow
Select previous characterShift+Left ArrowShift+Left ArrowShift+Left Arrow
Select next wordCtrl+Shift+Right ArrowOpt+Shift+Right ArrowCtrl+Shift+Right Arrow
Select previous wordCtrl+Shift+Left ArrowOpt+Shift+Left ArrowCtrl+Shift+Left Arrow
Select all textCtrl+ACmd+ACtrl+A
CopyCtrl+CCmd+CCtrl+C
Paste (in text fields only)Ctrl+VCmd+VCtrl+V
Cut (in text fields only)Ctrl+XCmd+XCtrl+X
Delete next character (in text fields only)DelDelDel
Delete previous character (in text fields only)BackspaceBackspaceBackspace
Delete next word (in text fields only)Ctrl+DelOpt+DelCtrl+Del
Delete previous word (in text fields only)Ctrl+BackspaceOpt+BackspaceCtrl+Backspace
+ +

Help Window Shortcuts

+ +

These shortcuts are available from Help windows.

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Navigate Links within Content Pane (right pane)TabTabTab
Switch between Content Pane and Search/Contents/Index/Glossary + (toggle)F6F6F6
Navigate Index Terms (while Index Pane is selected)Up/Down ArrowUp/Down ArrowUp/Down Arrow
Scroll Pane (Content, Table of Contents, or Index)Up/Down ArrowUp/Down ArrowUp/Down Arrow
Expand/Collapse Table of Contents Tree StructureLeft/Right ArrowLeft/Right ArrowLeft/Right Arrow
Print PageCtrl+PCmd+PCtrl+P
Go Back to Previous PageAlt+Left ArrowCmd+Left ArrowAlt+Left Arrow
Go Forward One PageAlt+Right ArrowCmd+Right ArrowAlt+Right Arrow
+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_composer.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_composer.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5490958d49 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_composer.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Composer Shortcuts + + + + +

Composer Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
New Composer PageCtrl+Shift+NCmd+Shift+NCtrl+Shift+N
Save PageCtrl+SCmd+SCtrl+S
Open FileCtrl+OCmd+OCtrl+O
Close PageCtrl+WCmd+WCtrl+W
PublishCtrl+Shift+SCmd+Shift+SCtrl+Shift+S
Find and ReplaceCtrl+HCmd+Opt+FCtrl+H
Find AgainCtrl+GCmd+GCtrl+G
Find PreviousCtrl+Shift+GCmd+Shift+GCtrl+Shift+G
Check SpellingCtrl+Shift+PCmd+Shift+PCtrl+Shift+P
Insert/Edit LinkCtrl+LCmd+LCtrl+L
Increase IndentCtrl+[Cmd+[Ctrl+[
Decrease IndentCtrl+]Cmd+]Ctrl+]
Discontinue Text StylesCtrl+Shift+YCmd+Shift+YCtrl+Shift+Y
Discontinue LinkCtrl+Shift+KCmd+Shift+KCtrl+Shift+K
Remove Named AnchorsCtrl+Shift+ACmd+Shift+ACtrl+Shift+A
Select Row/ColumnCtrl+DragCmd+DragCtrl+Drag
Select Cells(s)Ctrl+Click (drag to select block of cells, or continue clicking + to select individual cells)Cmd+Click (drag to select block of cells, or continue clicking + to select individual cells)Ctrl+Click (drag to select block of cells, or continue clicking + to select individual cells)
Decrease Font SizeCtrl+- (minus sign)Cmd+- (minus sign)Ctrl+- (minus sign)
Increase Font SizeCtrl++ (plus sign)Cmd++ (plus sign)Ctrl++ (plus sign)
Text Style BoldCtrl+BCmd+BCtrl+B
Text Style ItalicCtrl+ICmd+ICtrl+I
Text Style UnderlineCtrl+UCmd+UCtrl+U
Text Style Fixed WidthCtrl+TCmd+TCtrl+T
+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_mailnews.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_mailnews.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d7f6b3285a --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_mailnews.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Mail & Newsgroups Shortcuts + + + + +

Mail & Newsgroups Shortcuts

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

General Mail & Newsgroups + Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
ReloadF5 + F5
Move to Next Mail Pane (Folder, QuickSearch, Thread, + Message Panes)F6F6F6
Toggle Message Pane VisibilityF8F8F8
Toggle Folder Pane VisibilityF9Cmd+Opt+SF9
New MessageCtrl+MCmd+Shift+MCtrl+M
Get New MessagesCtrl+DCmd+DCtrl+D
Get All New MessagesCtrl+Shift+DCmd+Shift+DCtrl+Shift+D
Search MessagesCtrl+Shift+SCmd+Shift+SCtrl+Shift+S
+ +

Message List Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Save Message as FileCtrl+SCmd+SCtrl+S
Open Message (in a new window)Ctrl+OCmd+OCtrl+O
Delete MessageDelDelDel
Delete Message Immediately (without placing it in the Trash + folder)Shift+DelShift+DelShift+Del
Undo Delete MessageCtrl+ZCmd+ZCtrl+Z
Select All MessagesCtrl+ACmd+AAlt+A
Select ThreadAlt+Shift+AAlt+Shift+AAlt+Shift+A
Collapse All Threads\ (backslash key)\ (backslash key)\ (backslash key)
Expand All Threads* (asterisk key)* (asterisk key)* (asterisk key)
Message SourceCtrl+UCmd+UCtrl+U
Go to Next MessageFFF
Go to Next Unread MessageNNN
Go to Next Unread ThreadTTT
Go to Previous MessageBBB
Go to Previous Unread MessagePPP
Reply to Message (replies only to sender)Ctrl+RCmd+RCtrl+R
Reply to All in Message (replies to sender and to other email addresses + in message)Ctrl+Shift+RCmd+Shift+RCtrl+Shift+R
Forward MessageCtrl+LCmd+LCtrl+L
Edit Message As New (compose new email using the body and attachments + of the selected message)Ctrl+ECmd+ECtrl+E
Remove Message Label000
Label Message (5 customizable labels)1, 2, 3, 4 and 51, 2, 3, 4 and 51, 2, 3, 4 and 5
Mark Message As ReadMMM
Mark Thread As ReadRRR
Mark Thread As Read and Move to Next Unread MessageTTT
Mark Messages As Read by DateCCC
Mark All Messages in Selected Folder As ReadCtrl+Shift+CCmd+Shift+CCtrl+Shift+C
Flag MessageIII
Mark Message As JunkJJJ
Mark Message As Not JunkShift+JShift+JShift+J
Mark Message As Not ScamShift+PShift+PShift+P
+ +

Message Compose Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Paste As QuotationCtrl+Shift+OCmd+Shift+OCtrl+Shift+O
Paste Without FormattingCtrl+Shift+VCmd+Shift+VCtrl+Shift+V
RewrapCtrl+RCmd+RCtrl+R
Find and ReplaceCtrl+HCmd+Opt+FCtrl+H
Send Message NowCtrl+EnterCmd+ReturnCtrl+Enter
Send Message LaterCtrl+Shift+EnterCmd+Shift+ReturnCtrl+Shift+Enter
+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_navigator.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_navigator.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b2762e1f52 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/shortcuts_navigator.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,541 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + + Browser Shortcuts + + + + +

Browser Shortcuts

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Bookmarks Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Open Manage Bookmarks Window Ctrl+BCmd+BCtrl+B
Add Page to BookmarksCtrl+Shift+DCmd+Shift+D
File Bookmark (to customize and file a page you are bookmarking)Ctrl+DCmd+DCtrl+D
Sort Bookmarks Folder (selected folder in Manage Bookmarks window) + Ctrl+SCmd+SCtrl+S
Sort Bookmarks Folder by Name (selected folder in Manage Bookmarks + window) + Ctrl+NCmd+NCtrl+N
Bookmark Properties (for selected bookmark in Manage Bookmarks window) + Ctrl+ICmd+ICtrl+I
+ +

Page Navigation Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Open History WindowCtrl+HCmd+Shift+HCtrl+H
ReloadCtrl+RCmd+RCtrl+R
Force Reload (not from cache)Ctrl+Shift+RCmd+Shift+RCtrl+Shift+R
BackAlt+Left Arrow or BackspaceCmd+Left Arrow, Cmd+[ or Delete (Backspace)Alt+Left Arrow or Ctrl+[
ForwardAlt+Right ArrowCmd+Right Arrow, Cmd+] or Shift+Delete (Backspace)Alt+Right Arrow or Ctrl+]
UpAlt+Up ArrowOpt+Up ArrowAlt+Up Arrow
StopEscCmd+. or EscEsc
HomeAlt+HomeCmd+HomeAlt+Home
Go to Bottom of PageEndEnd
Go to Top of PageHomeHomeHome
Select All Text in Location BarCtrl+L or Alt+DCmd+LCtrl+L or Alt+D
Open Web Page LocationCtrl+Shift+LCmd+Shift+LCtrl+Shift+L
Open Selected Link in a Web PageEnterReturnEnter
Open search engine pageCtrl+Shift+SCmd+Shift+SCtrl+Shift+S
Move to Next Frame (in web pages using frames)F6Ctrl+Tab or F6 (if F6 is not programmed for another command)F6
Move to Previous Frame (in web pages using frames)Shift+F6Ctrl+Shift+Tab or Shift+F6 (if F6 is not programmed for + another command)Shift+F6
New Browser WindowCtrl+NCmd+NCtrl+N
New Private WindowCtrl+Shift+BCmd+Shift+BCtrl+Shift+B
Move to Next/Previous Link or Form Element in a Web PageTab/Shift+TabTab/Shift+TabTab/Shift+Tab
Open FileCtrl+OCmd+OCtrl+O
Close WindowCtrl+WCmd+WCtrl+W
Close Window (with more than one tab)Ctrl+Shift+WCmd+Shift+WCtrl+Shift+W
Save Page AsCtrl+SCmd+SCtrl+S
Save Linked Page (when a link is selected)Shift+EnterOpt+ReturnShift+Enter
Edit PageCtrl+ECmd+ECtrl+E
Print PageCtrl+PCmd+PCtrl+P
Go Up One PagePage Up or Shift+SpacePage Up or Shift+SpacePage Up, Shift+Space or Backspace
Go Down One PagePage Down or SpacePage Down or SpacePage Down, Space or Shift+Backspace
Go Up One LineUp ArrowUp ArrowUp Arrow
Go Down One LineDown ArrowDown ArrowDown Arrow
+ +

Page Viewing Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Full Screen (toggle)F11Cmd+Shift+FF11 (may depend on window manager)
Zoom Text SmallerCtrl+- (minus sign)Cmd+- (minus sign)Ctrl+- (minus sign)
Zoom Text LargerCtrl++ (plus sign)Cmd++ (plus sign)Ctrl++ (plus sign)
No zoom (100%)Ctrl+0 (zero)Cmd+0 (zero)Ctrl+0 (zero)
View Page InformationCtrl+ICmd+ICtrl+I
View Page SourceCtrl+UCmd+UCtrl+U
+ +

Tabbed Browsing Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
New Browser TabCtrl+TCmd+TCtrl+T
Switch to Next Tab (when using Tabbed Browsing with more than one + tab)Ctrl+Tab or Ctrl+Page DownCmd+Opt+Right Arrow or Ctrl+Page DownCtrl+Tab or Ctrl+Page Down
Switch to Previous Tab (when using Tabbed Browsing with more + than one tab) + Ctrl+Shift+Tab or Ctrl+Page UpCmd+Opt+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Page UpCtrl+Page Up
Close Tab (Close window if one page open)Ctrl+WCmd+WCtrl+W
Move Tab Left (when tab is focused)Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Up ArrowCmd+Left Arrow or Cmd+Up ArrowCtrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Up Arrow
Move Tab Right (when tab is focused)Ctrl+Right Arrow or Ctrl+Down ArrowCmd+Right Arrow or Cmd+Down ArrowCtrl+Right Arrow or Ctrl+Down Arrow
Move Tab to Beginning (when tab is focused)Ctrl+HomeCmd+HomeCtrl+Home
Move Tab to End (when tab is focused)Ctrl+EndCmd+EndCtrl+End
Open Link in a New Foreground Tab (when link is focused)Insert (or Alt+Insert) *(Alt+Insert) *Insert (or Alt+Insert) *
Open Link in a New Background Tab (when link is focused)Alt+Insert (or Insert) *Alt+InsertAlt+Insert (or Insert) *
+ +

* Shortcuts in parentheses apply when the + Switch to new tabs + opened from links setting is disabled. Depending on the + Open tabs instead + of windows settings, more keys might be available.

+ + + + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Open/Close Sidebar (toggle)F9Cmd+Opt+SF9
Switch to Next Sidebar PanelAlt+Page DownOpt+Page DownAlt+Page Down
Switch to Previous Sidebar PanelAlt+Page UpOpt+Page UpAlt+Page Up
+ +

Forms Shortcuts

+ + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
CommandWindowsmacOSLinux or Unix
Move to Next/Previous Item in FormTab/Shift+TabTab/Shift+TabTab/Shift+Tab
Submit FormEnterReturnEnter
Press Selected Button / Select Radio ButtonSpaceSpaceSpace
Select an Item from a ListUp Arrow, Down Arrow or First Letter of Item NameUp Arrow, Down Arrow or First Letter of Item NameUp Arrow, Down Arrow or First Letter of Item Name
Check/Uncheck Checkbox (toggle)SpaceSpaceSpace
Open a Drop-Down MenuAlt+Down ArrowOpt+Down ArrowAlt+Down Arrow
+ + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/ssl_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/ssl_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9725c90a61 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/ssl_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +SSL/TLS Settings + + + + +

SSL/TLS Settings

+ +

This section describes how to set your SSL/TLS preferences.

+ +
In this section: + +
+ +

Privacy & Security + Preferences - SSL/TLS

+ +

This section describes how to use the SSL/TLS preferences panel. If you are + not already viewing the panel, follow these steps:

+ +
    +
  1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
    2. +
  2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click SSL/TLS. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
    3. +
+ +

SSL/TLS Protocol Versions

+ +

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol + and its successor, the Transport Layer Security + (TLS) protocol, are standards which define rules governing mutual + authentication between a website and browser software and the encryption + of information that flows between them. They are also used for secure + communication in various other protocols, e.g., for protection of sensitive + information exchanged with email, calendar, or directory servers.

+ +

The SSL 2.0 and SSL 3.0 protocols are insecure and thus deprecated. The + current TLS protocol is based on SSL but with its own version numbering. + TLS 1.0 can be thought of as SSL 3.1, TLS 1.1 is in turn an update to TLS + 1.0, etc. Newer protocols are preferred over older ones as they provide + better security and more features. Older protocols are supported to ensure + compatibility.

+ +

By default, &brandShortName; will select the most secure version which is + widely supported to connect to the server. If that attempt doesn't + succeed, it will try to connect with the next older version, etc., to the + extent allowed by the settings in this panel. The connection will fail if no + protocol supported by both sides is found. You can exclude older versions + explicitly or allow newer versions which may not be widely supported yet + with the following options:

+ + + +

Notes:

+ + + +

SSL/TLS Warnings

+ +

It's easy to tell when the website you are viewing is using an encrypted + connection. If the connection is encrypted, the lock icon in the lower-right + corner of the browser window is locked + (). If the + connection is not encrypted, the lock icon is unlocked + (). Encrypted + pages which contain some unencrypted items (mixed content) are shown with a + broken-lock icon + ().

+ +

If you want additional warnings, you can select one or more of the warning + checkboxes in the SSL/TLS preferences panel. Unless stated otherwise, a + notification bar will be presented at the top of the page triggering the + alert, with an option to enter this panel to change the option if the alert + is considered annoying.

+ +

To activate any of these warnings, select the corresponding checkbox:

+ + + +

Mixed Content

+ +

In general, there are two major issues related to transmitting sensitive + information over an unencrypted connection: One is the danger of someone + eavesdropping on the line, thus listening to the content transmitted; the + other of someone intercepting requests for the desired page and replacing + the legitimate content of that page with own (potentially malicious) + content. While so-called Man In The Middle attacks can usually be + detected in encrypted connections (e.g., by a certificate mismatch or an + invalid certificate presented by the interceptor), no such verification + exists for unencrypted connections.

+ +

The term Mixed Content refers to a web page which itself is + encrypted, but which includes content on the same or a different server + which is not encrypted. Consequently, this part of the page is + still subject to the vulnerabilities of an unencrypted line. While there + are legitimate uses of that concept (such as including a company logo from + a different insecure website into an otherwise secure page), such designs + should be avoided.

+ +

There are two general types of mixed content:

+ + + +

The following options allow you to be warned about and/or to block both + mixed active and mixed passive content:

+ + + +

For short definitions, click + authentication, + encryption, or + certificate.

+ +

For more information about ciphers and encryption, see the following online + documents:

+ + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suite-toc.rdf b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suite-toc.rdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..838f04eebc --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suite-toc.rdf @@ -0,0 +1,1203 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suitehelp.rdf b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suitehelp.rdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..74d077a614 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/suitehelp.rdf @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + + + + + +
  • + +
    • +
  • + +
    • +
  • + +
    • +
  • + +
    • +
  • + +
    • +
  • + +
    • +     +     +     +     diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_certs_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_certs_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..70fc5d0096 --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_certs_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,598 @@ + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Using Certificates + + + + +

    Using Certificates

    + +

    A certificate is the digital equivalent of an ID card. Just as you may have + several ID cards for different purposes, such as a driver's license, an + employee ID card, or a credit card, you can have several different + certificates that identify you for different purposes.

    + +

    This section describes how to perform operations related to + certificates.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Getting Your Own Certificate

    + +

    Much like a credit card or a driver's license, a certificate is a form + of identification you can use to identify yourself over the Internet and + other networks. Like other commonly used personal IDs, a certificate is + typically issued by an organization with recognized authority to issue such + identification. An organization that issues certificates is called a + certificate authority (CA).

    + +

    You can obtain certificates that identify you from public CAs, from system + administrators or special CAs within your organization, or from websites + offering specialized services that require a means of identification more + reliable that your name and password.

    + +

    Just as the requirements for a driver's license vary depending on the + type of vehicle you want to drive, the requirements for obtaining a + certificate vary depending on what you want to use it for. In some cases + getting a certificate may be as easy as going to a website, entering some + personal information, and automatically downloading the certificate into your + browser. In other cases you may have to go through more complicated + procedures.

    + +

    You can obtain a certificate today by visiting the URL for a certificate + authority and following the on-screen instructions. For a list of certificate + authorities issuing certificates recognized by &brandShortName;, see the + online document + Included + Certificate List.

    + +

    Once you obtain a certificate, it is automatically stored in a + security device. Your browser + comes with its own built-in Software Security Device. A security device can + also be a piece of hardware, such as a smart card.

    + +

    Like a driver's license or a credit card, a certificate is a valuable + form of identification that can be abused if it falls into the wrong hands. + Once you've obtained a certificate that identifies you, you should + protect it in two ways: by backing it up and by setting your + master password.

    + +

    When you first obtain a certificate, you may be prompted to back it up. If + you haven't yet created a master password, you will be asked to create + one.

    + +

    For detailed information about backing up a certificate and setting your + master password, see Your + Certificates.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Checking Security for a Web Page

    + +

    When you're viewing any web page, the lock icon near the lower-right + corner of the window informs you whether the entire contents of the page was + protected by encryption while it was + being received by your computer:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    closed lock iconA closed lock means that the page was protected by encryption when it + was received.
    open lock iconAn open lock means the page was not protected by encryption when it was + received.
    broken lock iconA broken lock means that some or all of the elements within the page + were not protected by encryption when the page was received, even though + the outermost HTML page was encrypted.
    + +

    For more details about the encryption status of the page when it was + received, click the lock icon (or open the View menu, choose Page Info, and + click the Security tab).

    + +

    The Security tab for Page Info provides two kinds of information:

    + + + +

    Important: The lock icon describes only the encryption + status of the page while it was being received by your computer. To be + notified when you send or receive information without encryption, or to + block potentially harmful mixed content, select the appropriate SSL/TLS + warning and mixed content options. See Privacy & + Security Preferences - SSL/TLS for details.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Managing Certificates

    + +

    You can use the Certificate Manager to manage the certificates you have + available. Certificates may be stored on your computer's hard disk or on + smart cards or other security devices + attached to your computer.

    + +

    To open the Certificate Manager:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. In the Manage Certificates section, click Manage Certificates. You see + the Certificate Manager.
      4. +
    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Managing Certificates that + Identify You

    + +

    When you first open the Certificate Manager, you'll notice that it has + several tabs across the top of its window. The first tab is called Your + Certificates, and it displays the certificates your browser or mail client + has available that identify you. Your certificates are listed under the names + of the organizations that issued them.

    + +

    To perform an action on one or more certificates, click the entry for the + certificate (or CmdCtrl-click + to select more than one), then click one of the buttons at the bottom of the + Certificate Manager window. Each of these buttons brings up another window + that allows you to perform the action. Click the Help button in any window to + obtain more information about using that window.

    + +

    For more details on how to view and manage these certificates, see + Your Certificates.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Managing Certificates that + Identify People

    + +

    When you compose a mail message, you can choose to attach your digital + signature to it. A digital + signature allows recipients of the message to verify that the message + really comes from you and hasn't been tampered with since you sent + it.

    + +

    Every time you send a digitally signed message, your encryption certificate + is automatically included with the message. This certificate allows the + message recipients to send you encrypted messages.

    + +

    One of the easiest ways to obtain someone else's encryption certificate + is for that person to send you a digitally signed message. Certificate + Manager automatically stores other people's certificates whenever they + are received in this way.

    + +

    To view all the certificates identifying other people that are available to + the Certificate Manager, click the People tab at the top of the + Certificate Manager window. You can send encrypted messages to anyone for + whom a valid certificate is listed. Certificates are listed under the names + of the organizations that issued them.

    + +

    To perform an action on one or more certificates, click the entry for the + certificate (or CmdCtrl-click + to select more than one), then click one of the buttons at the bottom of the + Certificate Manager window. Each of these buttons brings up another window + that allows you to perform the action. Click the Help button in any window to + obtain more information about using that window.

    + +

    For more details on how to view and manage these certificates, see the + description of the Certificate Manager's + People tab.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Managing Certificates + that Identify Servers

    + +

    Some websites and mail servers use certificates to identify themselves. + Such identification is required before the server can encrypt information + transferred between it and your computer (or vice versa), so that no one + can read the data while in transit.

    + +

    If the URL for a website begins with https://, the website has a + certificate. If you visit such a website and its certificate was issued by a + CA that the Certificate Manager doesn't know about or doesn't + trust, you will be asked whether you want to accept the website's + certificate. When you accept a new website certificate, the Certificate + Manager adds it to its list of website certificates.

    + +

    To view all the website certificates available to your browser, click the + Servers tab at the top of the Certificate Manager window.

    + +

    To perform an action on one or more certificates, click the entry for the + certificate (or CmdCtrl-click + to select more than one), then click one of the buttons at the bottom of the + Certificate Manager window. Each of these buttons brings up another window + that allows you to perform the action. Click the Help button in any window to + obtain more information about using that window.

    + +

    For more details on how to view and manage these certificates, see the + description of the Certificate Manager's + Servers tab.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Managing + Certificates that Identify Certificate Authorities

    + +

    Like other commonly used forms of ID, a certificate is issued by an + organization with recognized authority to issue such identification. An + organization that issues certificates is called a + certificate authority + (CA). A certificate that identifies a CA is called a CA certificate.

    + +

    Certificate Manager typically has many CA certificates on file. These CA + certificates permit Certificate Manager to recognize and work with + certificates issued by the corresponding CAs. However, the presence of a CA + certificate in this list does not guarantee that the certificates it + issues can be trusted. You or your system administrator must make decisions + about what kinds of certificates to trust depending on your security + needs.

    + +

    To view all the CA certificates available to your browser, click the + Authorities tab at the top of the Certificate Manager window.

    + +

    To perform an action on one or more CA certificates, click the entry for the + certificate (or CmdCtrl-click + to select more than one), then click one of the buttons at the bottom of the + Certificate Manager window. Each of these buttons brings up another window + that allows you to perform the action. Click the Help button in any window to + obtain more information about using that window.

    + +

    For more details on how to view and manage these certificates, see the + description of the Certificate Manager's + Authorities tab.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Managing Certificates that + Identify Others

    + +

    To see all certificates that do not fit into any of the other categories, + click the Others tab at the top of the Certificate Manager window.

    + +

    For more details on how to view and manage these certificates, see the + description of the Certificate Manager's + Others tab.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Managing Smart Cards + and Other Security Devices

    + +

    A smart card is a small device, typically about the size of a credit card, + that contains a microprocessor and is capable of storing information about + your identity (such as your private + keys and certificates) and + performing cryptographic operations.

    + +

    To use a smart card, you typically need to have a smart card reader (a piece + of hardware) attached to your computer, as well as software on your computer + that controls the reader.

    + +

    A smart card is just one kind of security device. A security device + (sometimes called a token) is a hardware or software device that provides + cryptographic services and stores information about your identity. Use the + Device Manager to work with smart cards and other security devices.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    About Security Devices and + Modules

    + +

    The Device Manager displays a window that lists the available security + devices. You can use the Device Manager to manage any security devices, + including smart cards, that support the Public Key Cryptography Standard + (PKCS) #11.

    + +

    A PKCS #11 module (sometimes + called a security module) controls one or more security devices in much the + same way that a software driver controls an external device such as a printer + or modem. If you are installing a smart card, you must install the PKCS #11 + module for the smart card on your computer as well as connecting the smart + card reader.

    + +

    By default, the Device Manager controls two internal PKCS #11 modules that + manage three security devices:

    + + + +

    [Return to + beginning of section]

    + +

    Using Security Devices

    + +

    The Device Manager allows you to perform operations on security devices. To + open the Device Manager, follow these steps:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. In the Certificates panel, click Manage Security Devices.
      4. +
    + +

    The Device Manager lists each available PKCS #11 module in boldface, and the + security devices managed by each module below its name.

    + +

    When you select a security device, information about it appears in the + middle of the Device Manager window, and some of the buttons on the right + side of the window become available. For example, if you select the Software + Security Device, you can perform these actions:

    + + + +

    You can perform these actions on most security devices. However, you cannot + perform them on the Builtin Object Token or Generic Crypto Services, which + are special devices that must normally be available at all times.

    + +

    For more details, see Device + Manager.

    + +

    [Return to + beginning of section]

    + +

    Using Security Modules

    + +

    If you want to use a smart card or other external security device, you must + first install the module software on your computer and, if necessary, connect + any associated hardware. Follow the instructions that come with the + hardware.

    + +

    After a new module is installed on your computer, follow these steps to load + it:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. In the Certificates panel, click Manage Security Devices.
      4. +
    4. Click Load.
      5. +
    5. In the Load PKCS #11 Module dialog box, click the Browse button, locate + the module file, and click Open.
      6. +
    6. Fill in the Module Name field with the name of the module and click + OK.
      7. +
    + +

    The new module will then show up in the list of modules with the name you + assigned to it.

    + +

    To unload a PKCS #11 module, select its name and click Unload.

    + +

    [Return to + beginning of section]

    + +

    Enable FIPS Mode

    + +

    Federal Information Processing Standards Publications (FIPS PUBS) 140-1 is a + US government standard for implementations of cryptographic + modules—that is, hardware or software that encrypts and decrypts data + or performs other cryptographic operations (such as creating or verifying + digital signatures). Many products sold to the US government must comply with + one or more of the FIPS standards.

    + +

    To enable FIPS mode for the browser, you use the Device Manager:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. In the Certificates panel, click Manage Devices.
      4. +
    4. Click the Enable FIPS button. When FIPS is enabled, the name NSS Internal + PKCS #11 Module changes to NSS Internal FIPS PKCS #11 Module and the Enable + FIPS button changes to Disable FIPS.
      5. +
    + +

    To disable FIPS-mode, click Disable FIPS.

    + +

    [Return to + beginning of section]

    + +

    Managing SSL/TLS Warnings and + Settings

    + +

    The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol allows your computer to exchange + information with other computers on the Internet in encrypted form—that + is, the information is scrambled while in transit so that no one else can + make sense of it. SSL is also used to identify computers on the Internet by + means of certificates.

    + +

    The Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol is a new standard based on SSL. + The old SSL versions have been deprecated for security reasons and TLS is the + only supported protocol. The default set of enabled TLS versions works for + most people with current servers. However, in some circumstances system + administrators or other knowledgeable persons may wish to adjust the SSL/TLS + settings to fine-tune them for special security needs or to account for + limited capabilities of some legacy servers.

    + +

    You shouldn't adjust the SSL/TLS settings for your browser unless you + know what you're doing or have the assistance of someone else who does. + If you do need to adjust them for some reason, follow these steps:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, select SSL/TLS. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    + +

    For more details, see SSL/TLS Settings.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Controlling Validation

    + +

    As discussed above under Get Your + Own Certificate, a certificate is a form of identification, much like a + driver's license, that you can use to identify yourself over the + Internet and other networks. However, also like a driver's license, a + certificate may expire or become invalid for some other reason. Therefore, + your browser software needs to confirm the validity of any given certificate + in some way before trusting it for identification purposes.

    + +

    This section describes how Certificate Manager validates certificates and + how to control that process. To understand the process, you should have some + familiarity with public-key + cryptography. If you are not familiar with the use of certificates, you + should check with your system administrator before attempting to change any + of your browser's certificate validation settings.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    How Validation Works

    + +

    Whenever you use or view a certificate stored by Certificate Manager, it + takes several steps to verify the certificate. At a minimum, it confirms that + the CA's digital signature on the certificate was created by a CA whose + own certificate is (1) present in the Certificate Manager's list of + available CA certificates and (2) marked as trusted for issuing the kind of + certificate being verified.

    + +

    If the CA certificate is not itself present, the + certificate chain for the CA + certificate must include a higher-level CA certificate that is present and + correctly trusted. Certificate Manager also confirms that the certificate + being verified is currently marked as trusted in the certificate store. If + any one of these checks fails, Certificate Manager marks the certificate as + unverified and won't recognize the identity it certifies.

    + +

    A certificate can pass all these tests and still be compromised in some way; + for example, the certificate may be revoked because an unauthorized person + has gained access to the certificate's private key. A compromised + certificate can allow an unauthorized person (or website) to pretend to be + the certificate owner.

    + +

    One way to combat this threat would be for Certificate Manager to check a + previously downloaded certificate revocation list (CRL) as part of the + verification process. However, those lists may be large and need to be + updated frequently in order to remain current and thus useful.

    + +

    The preferred way to combat the threat of compromised certificates is to use + a special server that supports the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP). + Such a server can answer client queries about individual certificates (see + Configuring OCSP, below).

    + +

    The server, called an OCSP responder, receives an updated CRL periodically + from the CA that issues the certificates to be verified. You can configure + Certificate Manager to submit a status request for a certificate to the OCSP + responder, and the OCSP responder confirms whether the certificate is + valid.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Configuring OCSP

    + +

    The settings that control OCSP are part of Certificates preferences. To view + Certificates preferences, follow these steps:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Certificates. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    + +

    For information about the OCSP options available, see + Privacy & Security Preferences - + Certificates, OCSP.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_priv_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_priv_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..851b62565e --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/using_priv_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,1134 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +Using Privacy Features + + + + +

    Using the Cookie Manager

    + +

    A cookie is a small amount of information on your computer that is used by + some websites. For a brief overview, see + What Are + Cookies and How Do They Work?

    + +

    Before loading a web page that uses cookies, your browser handles the + page's cookies by doing two things:

    + + + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Enabling & Disabling Cookies

    + +

    You can specify how cookies should be handled by setting your Cookies + preferences. To change your Cookies preferences:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Cookies. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. Set your Cookies preferences.
      4. +
    + +

    For more information about the effect of each setting, see + Privacy & Security Preferences - Cookies.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Managing Cookies Website-By-Website

    + +

    To set cookie permissions for the current website:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the Tools menu and choose Cookie Manager.
      2. +
    2. Choose one of the following items: +
        +
      • Block Cookies from this Website: Block the + current website from setting cookies.
        • +
      • Use Default Cookie Permissions: Reset + cookie permission for the current website and use the + default settings.
        • +
      • Allow Session Cookies from this Website: Allow + the current website to set session cookies. Persistent cookies from + this website will be downgraded to session cookies.
        • +
      • Allow Cookies from this Website: Allow the + current website to set cookies.
        • +
      +
      3. +
    + +

    To set cookie permission for several websites + or a website you are not viewing, use the Cookie Manager.

    + +

    Other dialog options:

    + + + +

    If you want to change a remembered response later, use the Cookie Manager + to edit stored cookies and + add or remove cookie websites.

    + +

    To stop automatically accepting or rejecting cookies from a website:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the Tools menu and choose Cookie Manager.
      2. +
    2. Choose Manage Stored Cookies from the submenu. The Cookie Manager window + opens with a list of all the cookies stored on your computer.
      3. +
    3. Click the Cookie Websites tab. The sites for which you have allowed or + denied cookies are listed.
      4. +
    4. Click to select the website from which you no longer want to automatically + accept cookies, and then click Remove Cookie.
      5. +
    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Viewing Cookies

    + +

    To view detailed information about cookies:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the Tools menu and choose Cookie Manager.
      2. +
    2. Choose Manage Stored Cookies from the submenu. The Cookie Manager window + opens with a list of all the cookies stored on your computer.
      3. +
    3. Select a cookie to see its details.
      4. +
    + +

    For more information about the information displayed, see + Stored Cookies.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Removing Cookies

    + +

    Important: To remove cookies, follow the steps in this + section. Do not try to edit the cookies file on your computer.

    + +

    To remove one or more cookies from your computer:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the Tools menu and choose Cookie Manager.
      2. +
    2. Choose Manage Stored Cookies from the submenu. The Cookie Manager window + opens with a list of all the cookies stored on your computer.
      3. +
    3. Select one or more cookies and click Remove Cookie, or click Remove All + Cookies.
      4. +
    + +

    Even though you've removed the cookies now, you will reacquire those + same cookies the next time you return to the website.

    + +

    To prevent that from happening, select the checkbox labeled Don't + allow websites that set removed cookies to set future cookies. When this + checkbox is selected, websites for the cookies that you are removing are + added to the list of websites whose cookies will automatically be rejected.

    + +

    You must click OK for your changes to take effect.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Cookie Manager Settings

    + +

    This section describes how to set your Cookies preferences and control other + aspects of cookie handling.

    + +

    For step-by-step descriptions of various tasks related to cookies, see + Using the Cookie Manager.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Privacy & Security Preferences - Cookies

    + +

    This section describes how to use the Cookies preferences panel to change + which cookies &brandShortName; will accept from and return to websites. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Cookies. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    + +

    Cookies help websites keep track of information for you, such as the + contents of your on-line shopping cart or which cities' weather you want + to know about. For a brief overview, see + What Are + Cookies and How Do They Work?

    + +

    You can select one of these options:

    + + + +

    Note: Blocking cookies does not remove old cookies. By + blocking cookies you only block websites from setting new cookies, and old + cookies will still be sent to websites. To completely block a website from + receiving old cookies, you need to remove its + cookies. +

    + +

    Note: Per-website cookie permission + supersedes default cookie setting. For example, if you allow a website to set + cookies, the website can set cookies even if you choose Block cookies. +

    + +

    If you allow cookies or do not change the default setting, you can also + select the following preferences:

    + + + +

    You can also get more information about your stored cookies:

    + + + +

    Stored Cookies

    + +

    This section describes how to use the Stored Cookies tab of the Cookie + Manager. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the Tools menu and choose Cookie Manager.
      2. +
    2. Choose Manage Stored Cookies from the submenu. The Cookie Manager window + opens with a list of all the cookies stored on your computer.
      3. +
    + +

    The Stored Cookies tab lists all the cookies stored on your computer, the + websites they belong to, and their current status.

    + +

    When you select a cookie in this list, the following information about that + cookie appears in the bottom portion of the tab:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    ItemExplanation
    NameThe name assigned to the cookie by its originator.
    InformationA string of characters containing the information a website tracks + for you. It might contain a user key or name by which you are + identified to the website, information about your interests, and so + forth.
    Host or domainProvides the name of the cookie's host or domain. + +

    A host cookie is sent back, during subsequent + visits, only to the server that + set it.

    + +

    A domain cookie is sent back to any website + that's in the same domain as the website that set it. A + website's domain is the part of its URL that contains the name of + an organization, business, or school—such as netscape.com or + washington.org.

    +
    PathThe file pathway. This is provided only if the cookie should be sent + back to all URLs that are on that path or lower. For example, + http://a.b/x/y/z.html means that the cookie can also be set + for path x/.
    Send ForWhen this field is For encrypted connections only it means + that the browser checks the connection whenever the server asks for a + cookie and will not send it unless the connection is encrypted + (HTTPS).
    ExpiresThe date and time at which the cookie will be deactivated. The + browser regularly removes expired cookies from your computer.
    + +

    To remove cookies, click one of these buttons:

    + + + +

    Select this checkbox to prevent the cookies you remove from being added back + into the list later:

    + + + +

    Even if you remove cookies now, you will reacquire those same cookies the + next time you return to the website. To prevent that from happening, select + this checkbox. When this checkbox is selected, websites for the cookies that + you are removing are added to the list of websites whose cookies will + automatically be rejected.

    + +

    You must click Close for your changes to take effect.

    + + + +

    This section describes how to use the Cookie Websites tab of the Cookie + Manager. If you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the Tools menu and choose Cookie Manager.
      2. +
    2. Choose Manage Stored Cookies from the submenu. The Cookie Manager window + opens with a list of all the cookies stored on your computer.
      3. +
    3. Click the Cookie Websites tab.
      4. +
    + +

    The Cookie Websites tab of the Cookie Manager lists the websites for which + your decisions have been remembered, and what your decisions were. It also + allows you to add and remove websites from the list.

    + + + +

    To add cookies websites manually:

    + + + + + +

    To remove a cookie website:

    + + + +

    Once you've removed a website from this list, Cookie Manager remembers + nothing about it.

    + +

    Using the Password Manager

    + +

    Many websites require you to type a user name and password before you can + enter the website. For instance, personalized pages and websites containing + your financial information usually require you to log in.

    + +

    The user name and password you use at a particular website can be read by the + site's administrator. Potentially, that person could then attempt to log + into other websites where you may have used the same user name and password. + If this concerns you, you may wish to use a different password at every + website with which you register.

    + +

    Password Manager can help you remember some or all of your names and + passwords by storing them on your computer's hard disk, and entering + them for you automatically when you visit such websites.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Using + Password Manager to Remember User Names and Passwords

    + +

    When Password Manager is active (as it is by default), it gives you an + opportunity to save user names and passwords on your hard drive that you + enter while using the Internet.

    + +

    For example, after you log onto a website from a page that requests a user + name and password, a dialog box appears asking, Do you want Password + Manager to remember this logon? When you see this dialog box, you can + click one of the following buttons:

    + + + +

    Similarly, when you log onto an email account or an FTP site, or perform any + other action that requires the browser itself to display a special dialog box + for your login information, you can select this option in the dialog box:

    + + + +

    The next time you check your email or perform other tasks that require a + password only, the password will be submitted directly without any further + action on your part. For tasks that require you to enter both a user name and + password, you need to click a Login button or equivalent after Password + Manager fills in the information.

    + +

    Password Manager saves your user names and passwords on your own computer in + a file that's difficult, but not impossible, for an intruder to read. + See Encrypting Stored + Sensitive Information for information on protecting your stored user + names and passwords with encryption technology.

    + +

    If the Password Manager dialog box described above does not appear when you + click Submit after typing your user name and password, Password Manager may + be turned off or the website may disallow its use.

    + +

    To check whether Password Manager is currently active, see + Turning Password Manager On + and Off.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Entering User Names + and Passwords Automatically

    + +

    There are two different ways that Password Manager can fill in user names + and passwords on your behalf:

    + + + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Turning Password Manager On and + Off

    + +

    Password Manager is on by default. To turn it off:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. In the Password Manager section, deselect Remember passwords + to turn Password Manager off.
      4. +
    + +

    To turn Password Manager on, follow steps 1 and 2 above, but select the + checkbox in step 3 rather than deselecting it.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Viewing and Managing Stored + Passwords

    + +

    To see the user names and passwords you have stored and to display a list of + websites from which logon information never is saved:

    + + + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Clearing Private Data

    + +

    While browsing the web, various items of potentially private information + may be gathered and stored by &brandShortName;. This section describes the + types of such private data and options to remove them either manually by + request or automatically when shutting down &brandShortName;.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Types of Private Data

    + +

    Several types of information are gathered and kept by &brandShortName; while + you are browsing websites. Some of these data are necessary for those sites to + function properly or more efficiently, others are for your convenience.

    + +

    Privacy implications vary from type to type. For example, browsing history + and cache contents provide a snapshot of your recent browsing activity which + is local to your computer; cookies or offline web content may be used by a + website to track a user directly across visits (e.g., for statistical + purposes or for targeted advertisements).

    + +

    In private browsing mode, no + private data will be retained beyond the duration of the private session.

    + +

    The following private information may be stored locally by + &brandShortName;:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    TypeExplanation
    Browsing HistoryIf enabled in the + History preferences, + a history of any website pages you have visited is kept and + may be suggested to complete website addresses in the location bar.
    Location Bar HistoryThis is a history of web addresses which were entered + manually or copy-pasted into the location bar of the browser. This + list is available in the location bar menu.
    Download HistoryDepending on the options selected in the + Downloads + preferences, a history of files downloaded from + websites is maintained in the Download Manager.
    Saved Form and Search HistoryIf enabled in the + History preferences, + text entered into elements of forms (e.g., user names, but not + passwords) will be stored for the specified number of days; matches are + suggested in a list when you revisit that page. If you put the search + box onto your toolbar, the history of search terms will be + stored as well.
    CacheThe cache is a short-term store for web pages and other + data (like e-mail attachments for IMAP accounts or remote images in + messages) to avoid having these items being requested again from the + server if they were just recently accessed. The cache on your disk + may contain data up to the limit specified in the + Cache preferences.
    CookiesCookies are small pieces of information that websites use to + keep track of users and sessions, or to store website preferences. Use + the Cookies preferences to + specify to what extent cookies are permitted and for how long they are + kept.
    Offline Website DataWebsites may be permitted to store their pages' contents and + related data locally so that they are available for use without + a network connection. See the + Offline Apps + preferences for options to control this behavior and to inspect + the contents of stored offline website data.
    Saved PasswordsIf enabled in the + Passwords preferences, + &brandShortName; keeps entered passwords for later use, thus + you don't have to retype them every time you visit a website.
    Authenticated SessionsWebsites may require authentication (username and password, + asked for with a pop-up dialog) and can keep track of such by + authenticated sessions. A site will ask you for your credentials + again when you proceed to the next page after this information is + cleared.
    Site PreferencesSite preferences are locally stored preferences for the specific + website. These usually are the individual zoom level and the last + location of a downloaded file from this site on your local disk.
    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Privacy & Security Preferences + - Private Data

    + +

    This section describes how to use the Private Data preferences panel to + determine when and which type of private data should be deleted. If + you're not already viewing it, follow these steps:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Private Data. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    + +

    The Clear Private Data section provides the following + options:

    + + + + + +

    Note: Also consider more selective alternatives to delete + private data. For example, the individual preference panels for each type may + provide additional options, and the Data Manager allows to clear private data + by type and the specific domain of a website. Rather than clearing all cookies + when shutting down &brandShortName;, you could specify to allow cookies for + sessions only, thus giving you the opportunity to establish exceptions for + selected websites for which you want to retain cookies.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Clear Private Data Dialog

    + +

    Private data can be cleared at any time, either from the + Private Data preferences by clicking + the Clear Now button, or by selecting Clear Private Data from the Tools + menu of a browser window.

    + +

    In the dialog window you can confirm and change the + types of private data to be cleared + as follows: +

    +

    + +

    [Return to beginning of section]

    + +

    Browsing in a Private Window

    + +

    There may be occasions where you don't want &brandShortName; to keep + track of your browsing activities. For example, when someone else quickly + wants to use your computer and you don't want your current browsing + context disturbed; or, for confidential tasks such as online banking.

    + +

    Opening a private window starts a + private browsing session + in which no private data on the sites + and pages you visit are made available beyond the scope and duration of that + session. Each subsequently opened private window becomes part of the same + private session. It ends when the last private window is closed.

    + +

    Private windows are not entirely isolated from non-private windows; private + browsing just implies that &brandShortName; will not keep any local record + of your activities in such a window. Some private data may be shared between + private but not non-private windows and vice versa, others accessed in a + read-only mode from a private window.

    + +

    Note that Add-ons like plugins + and extensions may not be subjected to these policies and may change their + settings or modify their locally kept data even in a private window.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Opening a Private Window

    + +

    A browser window can be either in regular (non-private) or in private + browsing mode. It is not possible to switch a non-private browser window + into private mode, but you can open a new private window in two ways:

    + + + +

    Any number of private and non-private windows can be open at the same time, + but be aware in this case for which windows history information is kept.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Behavior of a Private Window

    + +

    A private window behaves differently than a non-private window in the way + it handles private data (see Types of + Private Data for detailed information of the individual categories). + Specifically, after closing a private session when closing the last private + window, no information related to that session will be retained in + &brandShortName;. Private data gathered in one private session won't + be available to any future private session either.

    + +

    Recognizing a Private Window

    + +

    To determine whether or not a window is in private browsing mode, have a + look at its title bar. Private windows show + - &brandShortName; Private Browsing + rather than just - &brandShortName; + at the end of the window's title.

    + +

    Navigation and Bookmarks

    + + + +

    Browsing and other Histories

    + + + +

    Cookies

    + + + +

    Cached and Offline Content

    + + + +

    Passwords and Authenticated Sessions

    + + + +

    Preferences and Permissions

    + + + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Leaving the Private Browsing + Mode

    + +

    There is no special function or command to leave the private mode, + and it is not possible to continue working in non-private mode with + a private window.

    + +

    To end a private browsing session, just close all private windows. + There will be no record on &brandShortName;'s side on any browsing + activities performed in any of the associated private windows.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Encrypting Stored Sensitive + Information

    + +

    If you use Password Manager to save passwords, then this sensitive + information is stored on your computer in a file that's difficult, but + not impossible, for an intruder to read.

    + +

    For example, if your computer is in an area where unauthorized people have + access to it, it's possible for a determined person to read the file + containing your sensitive information.

    + +

    For a greater degree of security, you may want to protect the file with + encryption. Encryption makes it much harder for an unauthorized person to + view your stored sensitive information.

    + +

    Your decision about whether to use encryption for stored sensitive data is a + tradeoff between improved security and convenience.

    + +

    If you use encryption, you will need to enter a master password, which can + be inconvenient. If you don't, it may be easier for a stranger who has + access to your computer to steal your passwords.

    + +
    In this section: + +
    + +

    Setting a Master Password

    + +

    To enable encryption of passwords you need to set a master password. If + your master password has not previously been set, you can set it at this + time:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. In the Change Master Password section, click Change Password to open the + Change Master Password dialog box.
      4. +
    4. Enter your desired master password, and retype it to confirm the + spelling.
      5. +
    5. Click OK.
      6. +
    + +

    Make sure your new password is difficult to guess. For some suggestions on + how to improve password security, see + Choosing a Good + Password.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Changing Your Master Password

    + +

    To change your master password:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. In the Change Master Password section, click Change Password to open the + Change Master Password dialog box.
      4. +
    4. Enter your current master password.
      5. +
    5. Enter your new master password, and retype it to confirm the + spelling.
      6. +
    6. Click OK.
      7. +
    + +

    Make sure your new password is difficult to guess. For some guidelines, see + Choosing a Good + Password.

    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Logging Out of Your Master + Password

    + +

    Normally, you are asked for your master password once during each + &brandShortName; session during which you access any of your stored sensitive + information.

    + +

    You can log out of your master password so that it must be entered again + before any sensitive information can be stored or retrieved. This is useful + if you are going to leave your computer unattended for a period of time.

    + +

    To log out of your master password:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the Tools menu and choose Password Manager.
      2. +
    2. Select Log Out from the submenu.
      3. +
    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    What to Do If You Forget + Your Master Password

    + +

    If you forget your master password, you won't be able to access any of + the stored password it protects. Your master password is your most important + password. Make sure you remember it or record it in a safe place.

    + +

    As a last resort, it's possible to reset your master password if you + are sure you can't remember it. However, resetting your master password + permanently erases all the web and email passwords, saved on your behalf by + Password Manager. You will also lose all your personal certificates + associated with the + Software Security + Device.

    + +

    Before taking this drastic step, read + Reset Master + Password.

    + +

    If you are sure you can't remember or retrieve your master password, + follow these instructions to reset it:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Passwords. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    3. Click Reset Master Password.
      4. +
    4. In the Reset Master Password dialog box, click Reset.
      5. +
    + +

    [Return to beginning of + section]

    + +

    Managing Images

    + +

    If you wish, you can choose not to download any images when you browse the + web. This greatly restricts what you can view online, but may be helpful if + you have a slow connection and wish to shorten the time it takes web pages to + load.

    + +

    You can also control how frequently animated images repeat their animation, + or turn off animation completely.

    + +

    The next section describes how to control these image settings. The default + settings allow all images to be accepted and allow them to repeat their + animation.

    + +

    Privacy & Security Preferences - Images

    + +

    This section describes how to set preferences for images. To view the + preference settings for images:

    + +
      +
    1. Open the &brandShortName; + Edit menu and choose Preferences.
      2. +
    2. Under the Privacy & Security category, click Images. (If no + subcategories are visible, double-click Privacy & Security to expand + the list.)
      3. +
    + +

    Image Acceptance Policy

    + +

    Image Acceptance preferences allow you to control whether or under what + conditions the &brandShortName; browser should display images:

    + + + + + diff --git a/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/welcome_help.xhtml b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/welcome_help.xhtml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9689969fec --- /dev/null +++ b/l10n-ja/suite/chrome/common/help/welcome_help.xhtml @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + %brandDTD; +]> + + + +&brandShortName; Help + + + + +

    Welcome to &brandShortName; Help

    + +

    To display information about &brandShortName; in this window, click + topics in the left-hand sidebar.

    + +

    For more information on using &brandShortName; Help, see + Using the Help Window.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

    Help on the Web

    Mozilla Community

    +

    Release Notes

    + +

    Latest information about known problems or issues with + &brandShortName;.

    +     		+

    MozillaZine

    + +

    The oldest community website around, providing news flashes, polls, and + Web forums.

    +
    +

    Troubleshooting

    + +

    Answers to some of the most frequently encountered problems.

    +     		 
    +

    Plugin Check

    + +

    Up-to-date information on &brandShortName; plugins.

    +

    Peer Support

    +

    MozillaZine + Forums

    + +

    Web forums for Mozilla users like you.

    +     		+

    User + Newsgroups

    + +

    User newsgroups hosted by mozilla.org.

    +
    +

    Realtime Chat

    +

    Chat with &brandShortName; users via IRC.

    +
    + + + -- cgit v1.2.3